JP7087292B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Generally, a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi is provided with a first starting port for performing a big hit lottery when a game ball wins a prize. Further, some gaming machines are provided with a second starting port that allows the gaming balls to be won by the operation of the electric accessory in order to make it possible to receive many big hit lottery with a small number of gaming balls. Further, as a gaming machine, there is one provided with a distribution device for alternately distributing game balls to a first starting port and a second starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-231902

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game to improve the motivation of the player to play the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to a game and the interest of the game to improve the player's motivation to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
A plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) having a function different from that of the first winning opening (314).
Discharge ports (317) for discharging game balls that did not enter the plurality of winning ports, and
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (36) that can move from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) where the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening (314).
Equipped with
A game ball distributed to the first passage (351) can enter the first winning opening (314).
The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352)
When the movable accessory member (36) is in the first position (standby position), entry into the second winning opening (315) is restricted, and the ball is ejected from the ejection port (317).
When the movable accessory member (36) is in the second position (operating position), the ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to a game and the interest of the game and improving the player's willingness to play a jackpot game.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 5 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device. The cross-sectional view for demonstrating the operation of the distribution member. A cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the sorting device. A cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the sorting device. 5 (A) and 5 (B) are sectional views for explaining the operation of the sorting device, and FIG. 5 (C) is a perspective view of the electric support member. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal symbol control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal electric accessory control process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the special figure game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a main part of a special variable winning device of a gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an opening / closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an opening / closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 53 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the distribution device of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53 (B) is the distribution of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the apparatus. FIG. 54 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54 (B) is a distribution of a gaming machine according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the apparatus. FIG. 55 (A) is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55 (B) is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 (C) is a plan view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. 56 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A1-A1 cutting line of FIG. 56 (A). FIG. 57 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the 18th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the support member, and FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 58 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A2-A2 cutting line of FIG. 58 (A). 59 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 21st embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 22nd embodiment of the present invention. figure. 60 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 60 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the main part of the support member. FIG. 61 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 25th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 61 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the 26th embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the main part of the support member. 62 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 27th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 28th embodiment of the present invention. figure. 63 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 29th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63 (B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 63 (A). FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device and an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 65 (A) is a view when the electric support member is in the standby state in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 65 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 65 (A). FIG. 66 (A) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 66 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A4-A4 cutting line of FIG. 66 (A). The figure which shows the main part of the game board which includes the distribution device of the game machine which concerns on 31st Embodiment of this invention, and the electric tulip accessory device. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device and an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 32nd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68 (B) is an embodiment of the 33rd embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the main part of the game board including the distribution device of the game machine which concerns on the form, and the electric support member. FIG. 69 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in a standby state, and FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram showing FIG. 69 (B). A) A perspective view of the main part. 70 (A) is a diagram showing a main part when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 70 (B) is a perspective view showing the main part of FIG. 70 (A). 71 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a thirty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71 (B) is a main part of FIG. 71 (A). The figure which shows the part. The figure which shows the main part of the game board which includes the distribution device of the game machine which concerns on the 36th Embodiment of this invention, and the electric support member. FIG. 73 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in a standby position, and FIG. 73 (B) is a diagram showing FIG. 73 (B). A) A perspective view of the main part. 74 (A) is a view showing the case where the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 73 (B), and FIG. 74 (B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the 37th embodiment of the present invention. .. FIG. 75 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a distribution device and an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 38th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A5-A5 cutting line of FIG. 75 (B), and FIG. 76 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. 75 (B). FIG. 77 (A) is a diagram showing a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the standby position, and FIG. 77 (B) is a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the operating position. The figure which shows. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modified example of the electric support member according to the 38th embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, the first to 38th embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25.

[Rough configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine provided with a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other machines such as a spinning machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like that is executed when the player operates the operation button 20 in a predetermined specific period in the special figure game effect.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation of the touch key by a player. Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that the panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the special figure game effect.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a gaming ball from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the game balls that have become surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and output audio in a game production or the like. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect depending on a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a left first starting opening 314L, a right first starting opening 314R, a second starting opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316b. Variable winning device 316, out port 317 (exhaust port), first through gate 318, second through gate 319, variable display unit 34, main display unit 37, distribution device 35, and electric support which is an ordinary electric accessory. A member 36 (movable accessory member) is provided. Hereinafter, the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R correspond to winning openings having the same function, and these are collectively referred to as "first starting port 314". The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 may be collectively referred to as "starting port 314, 315". Further, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as "through gates 318, 319". The general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b correspond to winning openings having different functions from each other.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, the game balls that did not enter the various winning openings (general winning opening 313, first starting opening 314, second starting opening 315 or variable winning opening 316b) after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is discharged from the out port 317.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launch mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching a game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the out opening opening 317. ing. The general winning opening 313, the left first starting opening 314L, the right first starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b each have a ball entry sensor 313a, which can individually detect the passage of the game ball. It is provided with 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 10). The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes.

The through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which the game ball can pass. The through gates 318 and 319 have ball entry sensors 318a and 319a (see FIG. 10) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 318 and 319. The ball entry sensors 318a and 319a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes. When the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a lottery per normal symbol (normal judgment) as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory that supports winning the second starting port 315. ) Is performed. However, the lottery for a normal symbol is not executed in the big hit game state. The lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol is clearly indicated by the ordinary symbol which is a combination of turning on and off the LED lamp pair on the ordinary symbol display 373, which will be described later. Hereinafter, the "ordinary symbol" may be abbreviated as "ordinary symbol", and for example, the "ordinary symbol random number storage area" is an abbreviation for "ordinary symbol holding area".

Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 arranged in the lower center of the game board 31, and the ball entry sensor 318a detects the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352. do. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the left side of the game board 31, that is, when the game board is hitting left, the game ball may pass through the first through gate 318. The first through gate 318 may be on the upstream side of the electric support member 36 in the path leading to the right first starting port 314R in the distribution device 35, for example, in the vicinity of the introduction port 350 above the distribution member 38. It may be arranged. Further, it is conceivable that the first through gate 318 is arranged in the vicinity of the life nail (navel nail) 31H outside the distribution device 35, the life nail (navel nail) 31H is omitted, and the life nail (navel nail) is omitted. ) It is also conceivable to arrange it in the portion where 31H is provided. Further, it is sufficient that the ball entry sensor 318a can detect the passage of the game ball in the specific area (in the present embodiment, the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35), and it is not necessary to configure it as a through gate. In this case, it is conceivable to attach a mark indicating that the area is a specific area to the position of the ball entry sensor 318a on the distribution device 35.

On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided on the right side of the game board 31 above the right portion of the variable winning device 316. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hitting to the right, the game ball may pass through the second through gate 319.

The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319a is input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a may be referred to as a prize. The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of a game ball by another detection method. It may be any sensor.

In addition to the variable winning opening 316b, the variable winning device 316 has an opening / closing door 316c for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316b. The opening / closing door 316c is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the variable winning device 316, the opening / closing door 316c opens to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316b, and the opening / closing door 316c closes to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316b. Will be done. The variable winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the opening / closing door 316c is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the player shifts to the jackpot game state when the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot, the player makes a right-handed hit in the round game in which the opening / closing door 316c opens to play the game to the variable winning opening 316b. You can win a ball. As a result, the player can obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special figure game.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the left first starting port 314L, the right first starting opening 314R or the second starting opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314La, 314Ra or the entry sensor 315a, the main A jackpot lottery (special determination) is performed by the control unit 331. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 313, the left first starting opening 314L, the right first starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b is the winning sensor 313a. When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316b. If so, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable winning opening 316b is opened, which will be described later. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 5 times, 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315, the big hit lottery is executed as described above. Then, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (first determination result and second determination result), the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 2R normal jackpot gaming state, a 2R probability variation jackpot gaming state, a 5R normal jackpot gaming state, a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variable jackpot game state, there are two round games in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316b. It is a game state including the opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state are game states in which the round game is performed 5 times in the open / close execution mode, and the 16R probability variation jackpot game state is the gaming state in which the round game is performed 16 times in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, it is possible to acquire the same level of game balls in any of the round games in any game state, and from the point of view of the game balls that can be acquired, the larger the number of round games in the open / close execution mode, the more the player becomes a player. It is an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous for the player in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, followed by the 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state that are advantageous for the player. Yes, the 2R normal jackpot gaming state and the 2R probability variable jackpot gaming state are the most disadvantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the special figure according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Various displays such as a game effect display are performed. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or at the left portion or the right portion. The sub-display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a symbol may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and the types of the main symbols are 9 types of "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special symbol game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. To. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

In the main display unit 37, the first special symbol display 371 (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 372 (second special symbol display unit), and the normal symbol are arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31. A display 373 and a hold number display 374 are provided. The main display unit 37 may be arranged at the lower left or lower right of the game board 31.

The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for winning a prize in the first starting port 314. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is referred to as the first special symbol. It should be noted that, in order to display the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the winning prize in the first starting port 314, the first special symbol is displayed as a stop display after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 371. It is called a design game.

The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for winning a prize in the second starting port 315. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is referred to as the second special symbol. It should be noted that the second special symbol game is displayed by changing the second special symbol and then stopping it in order to display the lottery result in the big hit lottery for the winning prize in the second starting port 315.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In addition, "special symbol" may be abbreviated as "special symbol". For example, "1st special figure" and "2nd special figure" are abbreviations for "1st special symbol" and "2nd special symbol", respectively, and "1st special figure game" and "2nd special figure game". "Is an abbreviation for" first special symbol game "and" second special symbol game ", respectively. Further, the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 are not limited to the 7-segment display, and for example, a group of LEDs in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a linear shape, a circular shape, an arc shape, a matrix shape, or the like. May be.

The ordinary symbol display 373 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 is operated (whether or not the support state is set) in response to the winning of the through gates 318 and 319. Clarify the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol display 373 includes a pair of LED lamps, and the lottery result is clearly indicated by an ordinary symbol which is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LED lamps. The ordinary symbol display 373 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the LED lamp pair.

In the hold number indicator 374, the hold number N of the variation display of the special symbol generated by winning the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is a plurality of LED lamps (8 in this embodiment) in a row. It is displayed by the number of lights of. Such display processing for the reserved number N is executed based on the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b of the RAM 412, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

The distribution device 35 is provided in the lower center of the game board 31. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, the distribution device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a distribution member 38, a first passage 351 and a second passage 352. In this distribution device 35, the game ball 99 that has entered through the introduction port 350 is in the left direction (counterclockwise direction of FIGS. 4 and 5 (A)) and the right direction (FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 (A) is rotated in the clockwise direction) to be alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

The introduction port 350 is a portion that allows the game ball to enter the distribution device 35. The introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (navel nail) 31H of the game board 31. Therefore, a game ball that has passed through the life nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. A game ball is guided to the life nail 31H mainly from the windmill 31F by the road nail 31M. Further, above the life nail 31H, a guide portion 31E is provided to guide the game ball that has fallen to the stage 31S to the life nail 31H via the warp opening 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the wind turbine 31F and the warp port 31W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the launch handle 22 is operated so that the game balls sent to the game board 31 pass through the left side of the game board 31. A game ball can be introduced into the distribution device 35 via the 350. In the gaming machine 10, the firing handle 22 is operated so that the gaming ball sent to the gaming board 31 passes through the right side of the gaming board 31, so-called right-handed hitting, the gaming ball is placed in the variable winning opening 316b. Nail is arranged in the gathering and life nail 31H so that the gaming ball does not gather, and in the case of right-handed striking, the introduction of the gaming ball from the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, it is easier to receive a big hit lottery by using the distribution device 35 than by performing a right-handed hit, and a left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than a right-handed hit (modes A to C described later in this embodiment). (See FIG. 13 (B))), it is encouraged to play the game by left-handed.

The distribution member 38 distributes the game ball introduced from the introduction port 350 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352. The first passage 351 is open downward, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 are discharged in the direction toward the left first starting port 314L provided directly below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is open downward, and the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is discharged in the direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided directly below the second passage 352.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the distribution member 38 has a rotation shaft 381, a partition 382, a ball receiving guide piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. In the distribution member 38, the partition 382, the ball receiving guide piece 383, and the eccentric portion 384 rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 381. The section 382 extends perpendicularly to the ball receiving guide piece 383 from the center of the ball receiving guide piece 383. The ball receiving guide piece 383 has a left ball receiving guide piece 385 on the left side of the section 382 and a right ball receiving guide piece 386 on the right side of the section 382.

Further, the eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the distribution member 38, and has a moving member 387 and an accommodating portion 388 for accommodating the moving member 387. The moving member 387 is, for example, a sphere, a cylinder, or the like, and moves the accommodating portion 388 left and right according to the posture of the distribution member 38. In the distribution member 38, when the partition 382 is tilted to the right with respect to the vertical direction (solid lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 is the accommodating portion 388. The center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the right side of the center by the moving member 387. As a result, the distribution member 38 can maintain the right tilted posture. On the other hand, in the distribution member 38, when the partition 382 is tilted to the left with respect to the vertical direction (states of virtual lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 has a moving member 387. It is located on the left side of the accommodating portion 388, and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. As a result, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left tilted posture.

In such a distribution member 38, the game ball 99 entered in the distribution device 35 is between the partition section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, and between the partition section 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. It is taken in one of the intervals. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6 (A) and 6 (B), when the distribution member 38 is in a right-tilted posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 (C) and 6 (D), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, the load of the game ball Rotates to the left (counterclockwise) and changes to a left tilted posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left ball receiving guide piece 385.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the game ball 99 guided to the left along the left ball receiving guide piece 385 falls along the first passage 351 and falls in the first passage 351. You can easily win a prize in the left first starting port 314L located directly below. In FIG. 4 and the like, the first passage 351 is linear, but the first passage 351 is non-linear like a bent shape, a curved shape, an inclined shape, or a combination of two or more of these. May be. In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is a position where a game ball passing through the first passage 351 can easily win a prize according to the position and shape of the exit of the first passage 351. Placed in.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the distribution member 38 is in the left tilted posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition section 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, the distribution member 38 rotates to the right side (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball and changes to a right tilted posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition section 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386 is guided to the right along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 and falls along the second passage 352. At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318. The fact that the game ball 99 has passed through the first through gate 318 is detected by the ball entry sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). As a result, an opportunity is given to perform a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory), and when the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol is a win, the electric support member 36 Is activated. The probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a hit, and the operating time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win will depend on the game state (mode) as described later. (See FIGS. 13 (B) to 13 (D)).

As shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the game ball 99 guided to the right along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and the second passage 352. It moves toward the right first starting port 314R arranged directly below.

Here, a second starting port 315 is arranged between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. The second starting port 315 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first starting opening 314L and the right first starting opening 314R, and the game ball 99 that has fallen to the ball receiving portion 391. Wins the second starting port 315. Further, a plate-shaped electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory is arranged between the second passage 352 and the right first starting port 314R. The electric support member 36 limits the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, and also to the second starting port 315. The operating position (first position) that supports the winning of the game ball, and the standby position that limits the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 and allows the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R (the first position). The second position) is moved in the front-rear direction at the opening 360 provided in the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 8C, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, since the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is electric. Since it is not limited by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second passage 352 can easily win a prize in the right first starting port 314R. The design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same manner as that of the first passage 351 and the arrangement of the right first starting port 314R is also changed as appropriate according to the shape of the second passage 352 and the like.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31, and the first right starting port is opened. Since the 314R is closed by the opening / closing portion 362 of the electric support member 36, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 that has fallen along the second passage 352 is guided above the ball receiving portion 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then the ball receiving portion 391. It falls to the part 391. The game ball 99 that has fallen to the ball receiving portion 391 wins a prize in the second starting port 315. Further, a game ball that flows down from above the stage 310 and the electric support member 36 provided below the variable winning device 316 and is received by the electric support member 36 can also win a prize in the second starting port 315. That is, in the present embodiment, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 are second by one electric support member 36. The ball can be entered into the starting port 315.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9 (C), the electric support member 36 is left between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable winning device 316 and above the right first starting port 314R. It is a plate-shaped member that is arranged downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, a pair of wall portions 361 projecting above the edge portion in the width direction are provided. These wall portions 361 function as guides for guiding the game ball 99 from the upstream end on the right side (upstream side) to the downstream end on the left side (downstream side). A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in this embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36. The plurality of delay guides 364 extend in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is formed in an inclined shape located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. Therefore, the plurality of delay guides 364 (delay portions) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) by a path meandering back and forth. Here, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining more profit than planned, which will be described later.

The configuration of the electric support member 36 can be changed in various ways. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a staggered manner, and the electric support member 36 does not necessarily have to be a plate-shaped member. A typical modification of the electric support member 36 will be described later as the 13th to 29th embodiments with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

By the way, as described above, the electric support member 36 is a normal symbol hit that is performed when the passage of the game ball at the through gates 318 and 319 is detected in the special figure game state in which the special figure game is executed. It is operated by winning the lottery result in the lottery. Further, the operating time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is short (for example, 0), which is determined according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state (modes A to E (see FIG. 13 (B) described later)). .6 seconds), in mode D and mode E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36, while being electrically operated from the stage 310 when hitting to the right. The time during which the game ball moved to the support member 36 and the game ball guided by the first retractable guide nail 393 and the second retractable guide nail 394 described later and received by the electric support member 36 cannot win the second starting port 315 (for example, 0). .6 seconds) is set. For one or both of the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319, when the passage of the game ball is detected, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing a lottery for a normal symbol.

Here, the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed is distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game ball in the first passage 351 wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L, and the first The game ball in the two passages 352 falls toward the right first starting port 314R. The game ball falling from the second passage 352 enters the right first starting port 314R if the electric support member 36 is not operating, and if the electric support member 36 is activated, the second starting is performed by the support by the electric support member 36. It is guided to the mouth 315. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the distribution device 35, such as when hitting to the right, is not introduced into the distribution device 35, so that the first start port 314 does not win a prize and the electric support member. If the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (mode A to mode C) even when the electric support member 36 is received by the operation, the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second starting port 315. However, the second starting port 315 does not win a prize. Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first starting port 314R and has a delay guide 364, it has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Therefore, in modes A to C in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects the game balls on the life nail 31H and uses the distribution device 35 to use the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Left-handed is encouraged to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the mode D and the mode E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time when the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 reaches the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, it is better to let the game ball pass through the second through gate 319 and to win the game ball in the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, which is a distribution device in which the game ball may win in the first start port 314. It is more advantageous for the player than using 35. Therefore, in the mode D and the mode E in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, right-handed striking is encouraged.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one provided with a distribution device for alternately distributing game balls to a first starting unit and a second starting unit having a function different from that of the first starting unit. However, when the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting unit and the second starting unit by the distribution device, there is a concern that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a distribution device 35 that alternately distributes game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, the first A first starting port 314 having the same function is provided below at each exit of the passage 351 and the second passage 352. Further, in the distribution device 35, the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, the MPU 41 makes a normal determination as to whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. Therefore, when a left-handed strike is made in order to use the distribution device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first starting port 314L by the first passage 351 and the game ball wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. The second passage 352 may lead the game ball to the right first starting port 314R, and the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36 may guide the game ball to the second starting port 315. Further, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball does not win a prize in the distribution device 35, and the electric support member 36 is operated when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, so that the second through gate 36 is operated. The game ball may be guided to the starting port 315. As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the monotonous one in which the gaming balls are distributed to two types of starting portions (first starting portion and second starting portion) having different functions as in the conventional gaming machine. Unlike, by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, it is possible to achieve a plurality of states in which the game ball can win a prize in the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is difficult and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine, the first starting portion is arranged at a position where a prize can be won when hitting to the left, while the second starting portion is located on the right side of the gaming board together with ordinary electric accessories such as a through gate and an electric support member. Many of them are placed in. In such a gaming machine, a gaming ball can win a prize in the first starting portion when a left-handed hit is made, whereas a gaming ball does not win in the second starting portion arranged on the right side of the gaming board. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball can be won in the second starting portion arranged on the right side of the gaming board, but the gaming ball is not won in the first starting portion. In general, the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the winning of the game ball in the second starting portion, is more advantageous than the winning of the game ball in the first starting portion. For example, in the jackpot in the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting portion, the ratio of the jackpot type advantageous to the player such as the jackpot with a large number of rounds in the jackpot game is high. In a gaming machine in which the function of the starting part that can win a prize is different between the case of left-handed and the case of right-handed, the jackpot winning probability and the winning probability per ordinary symbol are low as the gaming state, and the special figure fluctuation time and the normal figure fluctuation. It has a normal mode with a long time and a time-saving probability variation mode in which the jackpot winning probability and the normal symbol hit probability are high and the special figure fluctuation time and the normal figure fluctuation time are short. Further, in the normal mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is low and the fluctuation time of the normal figure is long, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of hitting the normal symbol is short. Therefore, in the normal mode, the support time of the ordinary electric accessory for winning the game ball to the second starting portion triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate is short, and the support of the ordinary electric accessory is infrequent. You can only receive it at. That is, in the normal mode, not only can you hardly receive the benefit of the support of the normal electric accessory even if you hit right, but you cannot expect the game ball to win the first starting part, so you can play the game by hitting left. It is a good idea to do it. On the other hand, in the time probability variation mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is high and the fluctuation time of the normal figure is short, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of hitting the normal symbol is long. Therefore, in the time-saving probability variation mode, the support time of the ordinary electric accessory for winning the game ball to the second starting part triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the support of the ordinary electric accessory is high. You can receive it frequently. That is, in the time-saving probability variation mode, it is better to win a prize in the second starting portion by hitting right, as compared with the case where the game ball is won in the first starting portion by hitting left. In other words, by hitting left in the normal mode, the game ball is won in the first starting part and the first special figure game is performed, while by hitting right in the time saving probability variation mode, the second special figure game is performed. The profit for the player is maximized. Further, as the probability variation mode, in addition to the time saving probability variation mode, there is also a gaming machine having a so-called latent probability variation mode in which the probability variation mode is not clearly specified. The latent probability variation mode has a high probability of winning a big hit like the time saving probability variation mode, but generally, the support of the ordinary electric accessory is the same as the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability change mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol with respect to the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the winning probability of the normal electric accessory operation in the normal symbol lottery is low. It is possible to receive the support of the ordinary electric accessory for the prize of the game ball to the starting part only in a low time and infrequently. Therefore, in the latent probability change mode, it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the second starting part when a right-handed strike is made. It is encouraged to play special games. Not limited to the normal mode and the latent probability change mode, in a gaming state where left-handedness is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantage of right-handedness such as making it difficult to receive support by a normal electric accessory.

On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with the distribution device 35, it is not clearly indicated that the special figure gaming state is the probability variation mode (high probability mode) as in the conventional gaming machine, and left-handed strike is encouraged. The mode C corresponding to the latent probability change is included, and in the mode C, the electric support member 36 operates for a short time when the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a hit. Therefore, even in the gaming machine 10, it is preferable to prevent the gaming ball from winning in the second starting port 315 even when the electric support member 36 is operated by right-handed striking in mode C. In the gaming machine 10, a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay portions are provided on the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory. Here, when the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay portions, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 is from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in a linear path. Move in the direction towards. On the other hand, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 as in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 meanders from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (upstream side) of the electric support member 36. Move toward the downstream side). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 on the electric support member 36, the moving distance of the electric support member 36 becomes large, and the residence time of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 can be secured for a long time. The time required for the game ball to reach the second starting port 315 can be made longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in the mode C. As a result, when the special figure gaming state is the above-mentioned mode C, and when the mode A and the mode B where left-handed strike is encouraged as in the mode C, that is, the mode in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short. In this case, even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 by the player hitting right, the electric support member 36 is before the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Since it returns to the standby state, it becomes difficult to make the game ball win a prize in the second starting port 315. As a result, when a hitting method (right-handed) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed) is performed, it becomes difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting opening 315. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of performing a right-handed strike in a gaming state in which a left-handed strike is encouraged, the player can be made to positively strike a left-handed strike.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, above the electric support member 36, a plurality of nails are formed between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the distribution device 35. A first evacuation guide nail 393 and a second evacuation guide nail 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided. These evacuation guide nails 393, 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36, which is the right region of the distribution device 35, in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. That is, the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second start port 315 of the electric support member 36, and the game ball can be received. It is possible to secure a long time to reach the second starting port 315. As a result, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C, as in the case where the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36. Since it is possible to prevent the second moving start port 315 from being reached in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the electric support member 36 when a non-recommended striking method is performed. Further, in the game machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven into the game board 31, it is possible to provide the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, when the electric support member 36 operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide unit (first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394). It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the electric support member 36.

As the evacuation guide portion, instead of the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394, it is conceivable to adopt a block-shaped member formed by resin molding, metal processing, a combination thereof, or the like.

On the other hand, when the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gates 318 and 319 in the mode D and the mode E is a hit, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6). Seconds). For example, in the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318, the distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36 is short, and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short time as in mode C. However, since it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 315, the second starting port 315 is also won in the mode D and the mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319 or the game ball launched before and after the game ball has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, but the electric support. Since the operating time of the member 36 is long, even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay portion 364, the second starting port 315 wins a prize. When the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time in this way, not only the game ball that falls through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 but also the game ball that flows down the right region of the distribution device 35. The game ball that has fallen to the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b can be guided to the second starting opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 is in a gaming state in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time because the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above. Left-handed striking in modes D and E cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in the mode D and the mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time, the player causes the electric support member by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the game board 31. In order to activate 36, it is encouraged to operate the launch handle 22 to play a right-handed game.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing a ball game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the ball game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 10, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has a general winning opening 313, a left first starting opening 314L, a right first starting opening 314R, and a second starting based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the mouth 315, the variable winning mouth 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a fluctuation pattern command and a shift command to the voice lamp control device 5.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 22 based on the information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. It is set in step S1808 in. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The shift command is a voice lamp control that the special figure winning / failing information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8 is shifted when the number of holdings N decreases. This is a command to notify the device 5. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 has a main timer interrupt described later each time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the embedded process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412 and the special figure reservation storage area 412b.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a is used for setting initial values of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 used for lottery for whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory, and the ordinary symbol per random number counter C4. The initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and after reaching a preset maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 738, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the counter value (random number value) at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 314 or the second start opening 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number value) is acquired, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is a low-probability mode (mode A, mode B and mode D described later) in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low due to the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in ROM 411. (See FIG. 13 (B))), and two types are set corresponding to the high probability mode (mode C and mode E described later (see FIG. 13 (B))) having a high probability of becoming a big hit. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit in the low probability mode (mode A, mode B and mode D) is 3 (0 to 0). 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3). On the other hand, in the high probability mode (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random values) for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 30 (0 to 29), and the big hit probability is 10 in the low probability mode. It is 30/739 (= about 1 / 24.6), which is double. Here, in the low-probability mode hit / miss table and the high-probability mode hit / miss table, three random value values (0 to 3) in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit are common, but it is considered that they are not common. Further, the random value that wins the jackpot does not have to be a continuous value, and may be a part or all discrete values. If the counter value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random number value) at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is individually set for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a jackpot for winning a game ball to the first starting port 314 (first special figure jackpot) and a jackpot for winning a game ball to the second starting port 315 (second special figure jackpot). ) And the distribution of jackpot types are different. Here, FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol game triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 314, the big hit types are 2R probability variation big hit (first judgment result) and 2R normal big hit ( It is distributed to any of the second determination results). The number of random numbers that become 2R probable jackpots is 15 from 0 to 14, and the number of random numbers that become 2R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. Does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12 (D), in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol game triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 315, a 5R probability variable jackpot (first judgment result) and a 16R probability variable jackpot (first). It is divided into either 1 judgment result) or 5R normal jackpot (2nd judgment result). The number of random numbers that will be a 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that will be a 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. Yes, there are no random numbers that are 2R normal jackpots and 2R probability variable jackpots. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of the probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and the probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game (5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot). The probability of is 75% (15/20). That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probabilistic machine in which the probability of the probabilistic jackpot is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution of the jackpot type differs between the first special figure jackpot and the second special figure jackpot, but the number of round games in the jackpot game is the first special figure jackpot for the second special figure jackpot. In terms of the number of round games, the second special figure jackpot is more advantageous for the player.

In this embodiment, a game ball is won in the first starting port 314, which is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game, and a game ball is entered in the second starting port 315, which is an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game. An individual jackpot type distribution table is set for each of the prizes, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins the first start opening 314 or the second start opening 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a gaming machine having specifications different from those of the loop probabilistic machine such as a so-called limit machine, ST machine, V-ST machine, and one-type two-kind mixer. .. An example in which the gaming machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a type 2 mixer will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50 as the third to sixth embodiments. ..

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot (second determination result) and 2R probability variation based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE. It is determined whether the jackpot (first determination result), the 5R probability variation jackpot (first determination result), the 5R normal jackpot (second determination result), the 16R probability variation jackpot (first determination result), or the deviation. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a miss for a prize for the first starting port 314, and the second starting port 315. For the winning prize, it is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a miss.

Here, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit, the open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened is repeated twice is executed. When the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a 5R probability variable big hit or a 5R normal big hit, the open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened is repeated five times is executed. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode (game state) according to the jackpot type. Here, FIG. 13A is a mode transition table that defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a 2R normal big hit, the mode B is entered after the big hit game is completed. If the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode C is entered after the jackpot game is completed. When the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode D is entered after the jackpot game is completed. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E is entered after the jackpot game is completed. That is, since the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot in the winning of the first starting port 314L, 314R is 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12C), the winning of the first starting port 314L, 314R In the jackpot, the game shifts to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot in the winning of the second starting port 315 is 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12 (D)), the winning of the second starting port 315 is In the jackpot, the game shifts to mode D or mode E after the jackpot game is completed.

Here, FIG. 13B shows the mode types (modes A to E) in the special figure gaming state in which the special symbol changes due to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 314L, 314R, 315 in the gaming machine 10. It is a mode data table that defines the contents.

Mode A is a mode that shifts to the case where the upper limit number of special figure games is completed, that is, when the time reduction is completed in mode B or mode D, which is a limited number of time reduction mode described later, and is clearly described from the explanation described later. However, it is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player among the modes A to E. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the gaming state is set to the mode A even when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. The gaming state when the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on is the gaming state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

Mode A (first game state) is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). Will be. Further, the mode A is a non-time saving mode in which the variation display time of the normal symbol is not shortened (time reduction) and the variation display time of the normal symbol is the normal variation display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes through the position of the electric support member 36, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery becomes a hit. Even if the electric support member 36 operates, it cannot be expected that the second starting port 315 will be won by the support of the electric support member 36. Further, the mode A is a low-probability mode per normal symbol in which the lottery per normal symbol is performed based on the low-probability normal symbol low-probability hit / miss table in which the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is won is low. Therefore, in mode A, the first special figure game is executed except for irregular cases such as the game ball accidentally passing through the second passage 352 at the operation timing of the electric support member 36, and the second special figure game is executed. Is practically not executed.

Here, FIG. 13C shows an example of a normal symbol low probability hit / miss table. In the normal symbol low probability hit / fail table shown in FIG. 13 (C), one counter value (see FIG. 11) of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) consisting of 200 counter values (random number values) from 0 to 199. 199) corresponds to the winning of the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to the deviation of the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability hit / miss table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a win is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be a hit is low, and the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be a hit to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Expectations for winning a game ball are low. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the ordinary winning lottery based on the ordinary symbol low probability winning / failing table will be won is especially if there is a clear probability difference from the probability that the lottery result based on the ordinary symbol high probability winning / failing table will be won. There is no limit, and the probability that the lottery result will be won may be 0%, and it is also conceivable that the lottery per symbol is not normally performed in mode A. Further, in mode A, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the lottery for the normal symbol is not performed. It is also possible to make it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, in the mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a hit. Then, as described above, above the electric support member 36, the evacuation guide nail 393, which guides the game ball flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in the direction of evacuation from the distribution device 35 (second starting port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5 (A)) is provided. Therefore, in the mode A, even if the lottery result in the normal symbol hit lottery is a hit as described above, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is for the game ball that flows down the right side of the game board 31 by right-handed hitting. In the case of right-handed hitting, it is difficult for the electric support member 36 to support the winning of the second starting port 315. In addition to this, since the probability that the lottery result in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery will be a hit is low, in mode A, the game ball wins the second starting port 315, which is distributed to the jackpot type advantageous to the player. Can hardly be expected. Further, in the case of right-handed striking, not only the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected, but also the introduction of the game ball into the distribution device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode A, the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by left-handed, the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35, and a big hit lottery is received by winning the game ball to the first starting openings 314L and 314R. Is encouraged.

In this way, in mode A, left-handed strike is encouraged, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a hit is low, and the operation timing of the electric support member 36 is different from the passing timing of the game ball. Therefore, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot lottery is performed for winning a game ball in the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and most of the jackpot types in mode A are 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot. As a result, the mode A is extremely easy to shift to the mode B or the mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and does not substantially shift to the mode D and the mode E.

Mode B (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A. be.

Mode B is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low as in mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). .. Further, unlike the mode A, the mode B is a time saving mode in which the variation display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variation display time is shorter than the normal variation display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the non-time reduction mode. The mode is continued at the maximum until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). That is, although the mode B is a time-saving mode in which the upper limit is set for the number of times of time-saving, it is a mode more advantageous than the mode A because it is a time-saving mode. Here, the shortened variation display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can win a prize in the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36 are set. It is set according to the positional relationship (distance, etc.) with and the operating time of the electric support member 36, and is set to, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this embodiment, the effect indicating that the mode B (time saving mode) is specified may be executed in the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the staging may be performed by the staging means as a chance zone suggesting the possibility of probabilistic change. If the upper limit number of special figure games is played without the lottery result in the jackpot lottery being a jackpot in mode B, the mode A is entered.

Further, in mode B, the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the high probability winning / failing table of the ordinary symbol, which has a high probability that the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol will be won, and this is also a mode more advantageous than mode A. be. Here, FIG. 13 (D) shows an example of a normal symbol high probability hit / miss table. In the normal symbol high probability hit / fail table shown in FIG. 13 (D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random number values) of the random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) per normal symbol are drawn by lottery per normal symbol. Corresponding to the hit of the lottery result, the remaining one (199) corresponds to the deviation of the lottery result. In other words, in the normal symbol high probability hit / miss table, the counter value (random value) of hit and miss is opposite to that of the normal symbol low probability hit / miss table, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a win is 99.5. It is set to% (199/200). Therefore, in the mode B, it can be expected that the game ball wins the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 due to the winning result of the lottery per normal symbol. The probability that the lottery result in the ordinary winning lottery based on the ordinary symbol low probability winning / failing table will be won does not have to be 99.5%, and may be another percentage. Further, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the lottery for the normal symbol is not performed. It is also possible to make it. Further, in mode B, the winning probability in the lottery per normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol may be set. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode B, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50. %become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), in the mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery per normal symbol is won, as in the mode A, and the player hits right. It cannot be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 of the above. Therefore, in mode B, left-handed strike is encouraged as in mode A.

As described above, in mode B, since the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, left-handed strike is encouraged instead of right-handed strike, but unlike mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery will be won. Therefore, for the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, it can be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Specifically, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 as described above, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 pass through the first through gate 318. At this time, in the mode B, the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the high probability hit / miss table of the ordinary symbol per ordinary symbol, triggered by the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 318. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 and passing through the first through gate 318 receives the support of the electric support member 36 with a high probability (99.5% in this embodiment) and reaches the second starting port 315. Win a prize. If the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is out of order, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins the right first starting port 314R.

Then, in mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning a game ball in the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning a game ball in the second starting port 315. On the other hand, there is a 0.25% probability that the game ball will win a prize in the right first starting port 314R. As a result, in the jackpot in mode B, about half (50.25%) become 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot, and shift to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed. In addition, in the jackpot in mode B, about half (49.75%) become 5R normal jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot, and shift to mode D after the jackpot game for 5R normal jackpot is completed, and 5R probability variable jackpot and After the end of the jackpot game for the 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E is entered (see FIG. 13 (A)). That is, in mode B, since the big hit lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315 is received in about half of the special figure games by the support of the electric support member 36, the 5R normal big hit with a large expected number of acquisitions, It is expected that the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot will be won, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode D and the mode E in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long will be entered as described later. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility that the player wins an advantageous jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot, the mode shifts to a mode more advantageous than mode B. In terms of points, it is a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the mode A.

Mode C (second game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R probability variation jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is a mode (game) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A and mode B. State). Mode C is a jackpot high-probability mode (probability variation game state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is likely to be a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12B). In this respect, it is a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the mode A and the mode B. Further, the mode C is a time saving mode like the mode B, but unlike the mode B, the time saving mode is continued until the lottery result in the big hit lottery becomes a big hit. That is, the mode C is a jackpot guarantee time saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and is also a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous than the mode B in this respect. In this embodiment, the mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341 for the special figure game or the jackpot game. That is, the mode C is a so-called latent probability change mode. Of course, in mode C, it may be clearly indicated in the staging means that it is a high-probability mode, and it is clearly shown in the staging means that it is a time-saving mode as in mode B, suggesting the possibility of probabilistic change. As a chance zone, the production may be performed by the production means.

Further, in mode C, as in mode B, the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the normal symbol high probability winning / failing table, but as in mode A and mode B, the electric support when the lottery per ordinary symbol is won. Since the operating time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), it cannot be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 by right-handed striking. Therefore, left-handed strike is encouraged even in mode C. In mode C, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the lottery for the normal symbol is not performed. It is also possible to make it. Further, in mode C, the winning probability in the lottery per normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol may be set. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50. %become.

As described above, in the mode C, as in the mode A and the mode B, the left-handed strike is encouraged because the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, but there is a probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery will be a hit. Since it is expensive, the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 can be expected to win a prize in the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, and in this respect as well, it is higher than the mode A. This is an advantageous mode (gaming state). Then, in mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning the game ball to the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of going to the second starting port 315. It is performed for the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R with a probability of 0.25% for the winning of the game ball of. Therefore, the jackpot type expected for the jackpot in mode C and the mode of the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game are the same as in mode B. That is, in mode C, as in mode B, about half of the special figure games can receive a big hit lottery for winning a game ball to the second starting port 315, so 5R normal big hits and 5R with a large number of expected acquisitions. It can be expected that the probabilistic jackpot and the 16R probabilistic jackpot will be won, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode D and the mode E in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long will be entered as described later. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A, and as in mode B, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot that is advantageous for the player.

Mode D (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is a mode (game) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A and mode B. State). Mode D is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low as in mode A and mode B, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). Will be done. Further, the mode D is a time-saving mode for a limited number of times as in the mode B, and shifts to the mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games is performed. Further, the mode D is performed based on the high probability winning / failing table in which the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery is likely to be a hit, and this point is also the same as the mode C. It should be noted that in the mode D, it is clearly shown that the time saving mode is used in the staging by the staging means such as the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the staging may be performed by the staging means as a chance zone suggesting the possibility of probabilistic change.

However, unlike Mode A to Mode C, Mode D has a longer operating time (for example, 6 seconds) of the electric support member 36 when the lottery per symbol is won, which is more advantageous than Mode A to Mode C in this respect. Mode (game state). Since the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long in the mode D, the game ball flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 and the game ball falling on the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b are electrically operated as described above. It can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the support member 36. Therefore, right-handed striking is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the right side of the game board 31. Further, in mode D, since it is difficult to introduce the game ball into the distribution device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly wins in the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 315 and a big hit lottery is held. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode D after the jackpot game for this jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, a mode after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends. Move to E (see FIG. 13 (A)). That is, in mode D, unlike modes A to C as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, and a big hit lottery is received exclusively for the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315. can. Therefore, in mode D, the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is either a 5R normal jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot with a large expected number of game balls. After the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed, the electric support member 36 shifts to the mode D or the mode E in which the operating time is long, and thus the mode (game state) is more advantageous than the modes A to C in these respects.

Mode E (third game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot game or the 16R probability variation jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is the most game among modes A to E. This is a mode that is advantageous to the person. Similar to mode C, mode E is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variation game state) in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is high, and the jackpot lottery is a high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12B). ), And it is also a jackpot guarantee time saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed. In mode E, it is clearly shown that the game is in a probabilistic game state (high probability mode) in the staging by the staging means such as the symbol display unit 341.

However, unlike the mode C, the mode E has a long operating time (for example, 6 seconds) of the electric support member 36 when the lottery per normal symbol is won, as in the mode D. Therefore, in mode E, right-handed striking is encouraged as in mode D. Then, in mode E, since it is difficult to introduce the game ball into the distribution device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly wins in the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 315 and a big hit lottery is held. Therefore, the jackpot type expected for the jackpot in mode E and the mode of the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game are the same as in mode D. That is, in mode E, since the jackpot lottery is exclusively received for the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, there is a high probability that either the 5R normal jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, which has a large number of expected acquisitions, will be won. Win (approximately 100%).

In addition, it is conceivable that the electric support member 36 operates a plurality of times for a hit in one ordinary symbol hit lottery. For example, in the mode D and the mode E, it is conceivable that the total operating time of the electric support member 36 is set to 6 seconds by performing the operation of operating the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times. However, the one-time operation time and the number of operations of the electric accessory 36 described above are examples and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operating time of the electric support member 36 in the mode D and the mode E is not limited to 6 seconds and can be changed as appropriate. Further, when a normal jackpot such as a 5R normal jackpot is won in mode E, the mode A shifts to the non-time saving mode mode A or the mode B in which the operating time of the electric accessory 36 is short, instead of the mode D. You may. In these cases, mode D is omitted.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, a time-saving mode in which an ordinary electric accessory such as an electric support member operates frequently and for a long time makes it easy to win a prize in the second starting port, and an ordinary electric accessory operates in a low frequency and short time. Some have a non-time saving mode. In this type of gaming machine, the non-time saving mode is set in the normal gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is low, and the time saving mode is set in the probabilistic gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is high.

However, the theoretical probability that the conventional gaming machine can receive the support by the ordinary electric accessory in the time saving mode is constant, the playing property in the time saving mode is poor, and it is difficult to create a new game property. ..

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 includes modes A, mode C, and mode E as special gaming states. In these modes A, mode C and mode E, the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is different. Specifically, in mode A, the ball entry ratio to the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and in mode C, the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is approximately 50%: 50%. In mode E, the ball entry ratio to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, the game playability is improved based on the three modes A, C, and E in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting portion and the second starting portion are different. It becomes possible to create playability.

For example, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop probabilistic machine, but in the conventional loop probabilistic machine, a mode in which the ball entry ratio to the first start port 314 is approximately 100% and a ball entry to the second start port 315 are performed. Although it had a mode in which the ratio was approximately 100%, the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 as in mode C of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment was approximately 50%: 50. It did not have a% mode. On the other hand, the mode E, which is most advantageous to the player who wins the jackpot to which a large amount of game value is given, is typically shifted to the high probability mode mode C by the first hit in the mode A, and in this mode C. It is necessary to win a big hit by a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 315 with a probability of about 50%. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to go through the stage of acquiring a big hit at the second starting port 315 in the mode C before shifting to the mode E, and the barrier to be overcome in order to shift to the most advantageous mode E is overcome. The new playability of having is given to the loop probabilistic machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the playability and the interest while suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the gaming machine 10 further includes the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for which the number of times is limited, as the special figure gaming state, it becomes easy to create a new gaming property with improved game performance. Specifically, the mode E is typically transitioned from the high probability mode mode C as described above, but is also transitioned from the low probability mode mode B and mode D. That is, there is a possibility that the mode B and the mode D, which are shifted due to the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, are also shifted to the mode E. Since the mode B and the mode D are in the low probability mode, the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit is lower than that in the mode C, so that the mode B and the mode D are shifted to the mode E. Needs to overcome higher barriers than when transitioning from mode C to mode E. Further, in mode D, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, whereas in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 315 in mode B and mode D. Because of the difference, the height of the barrier to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E differs between the mode B and the mode. As described above, by having the mode B and the mode D as the special game state, the game playability having a plurality of barriers (three types of barriers in the present embodiment) having different difficulties to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E is achieved. It is given to the loop probability change machine. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability and the interest while suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 314 or the second start opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variation display on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in ROM 411, the front / rear deviation reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which the reach does not occur, is set. Here, the reach indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processes.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as a special figure game effect. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process described later is executed once by the MPU 41 with reference to FIG. 17, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 314 or the second start opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and the preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 describes the fluctuation pattern while referring to the low-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, the high-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, or the out-of-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411 according to the lottery result. Specify the type. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided depending on whether the current gaming state is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, or may be provided individually for each of modes A to E.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display 371, the second special symbol display 372, and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the fluctuation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 according to the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , Turn off.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

The random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is used for a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated for a predetermined time. For example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 199, and the maximum value is reached. It is a loop counter that is returned to 0 after the operation. The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 described later, and the counter value (random number value) is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Then, based on this counter value (random number value), a lottery is usually performed per symbol. In the normal symbol winning lottery, when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), and the big hit game is performed. This is performed every time the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, provided that the game is not executed and the electric support member 36 is not operating. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lottery for a normal symbol is not held as in the big hit lottery. On the other hand, when the count value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired for the ordinary winning lottery, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per ordinary symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. ..

The special figure holding storage area 412b includes the first special figure holding area RE1, the second special figure holding area RE2, the third special figure holding area RE3, the fourth special figure holding area RE4, the fifth special figure holding area RE5, and the sixth. The special figure holding area RE6, the 7th special figure holding area RE7, the 8th special figure holding area RE8, the special figure holding number storage area NA, and the special figure execution area AE are included.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the special figure hit / miss information is placed in any of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8. The winning of the game ball for the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315 are stored in the order of winning without distinction. The special figure hit / miss information includes numerical information which is a counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired when the game ball wins the starting ports 314 and 315. Start port information (special figure information) that can distinguish whether it is for a prize in the first start port 314 or a prize in the second start port 315, and a mode when the special figure pass / fail information is acquired. Includes mode information for the type (mode A to mode E).

The lottery counter 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 correspond to each of the winning of the first starting port 314 and the winning of the second starting port 315. Etc.) may be provided individually.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is any of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8. It is stored in the crab. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed based on the special figure winning / failing information stored in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8, it is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. It is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting ports 314 and 315, the special figure hit / miss information is the first special figure holding area RE1, the second special figure holding area RE2, the third special figure holding area RE3, and the fourth. It is stored in a vacant area in the order of priority of the special figure holding area RE4, the fifth special figure holding area RE5, the sixth special figure holding area RE6, the seventh special figure holding area RE7, and the eighth special figure holding area RE8. In the special figure holding number storage area NA, the number of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 in which the special figure winning / failing information is stored is stored as the holding number N. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first special drawing holding area RE1 to the eighth special drawing holding area RE8 can be used as a winning history of the game balls to the starting ports 314 and 315. It is possible to hold up to eight special figures winning / failing information in the order of winning.

The special figure execution area AE is a storage used for moving the special figure hit / miss information stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is an area. Then, at the start of one first special figure game or the second special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on the numerical information and the mode information stored as the special figure hit / miss information in the special figure execution area AE. If the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type distribution lottery is performed based on the start opening information (special figure information) stored as the special figure winning / failing information. Further, when the special figure hit / miss information of the first special figure hold area RE1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure hit / miss information of the second special figure hold area RE2 to the eighth special figure hold area RE8 is given priority. The first special figure holding area RE1 to the seventh special figure holding area RE7, which are one higher in rank, are shifted. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure winning / failing information is the first special figure holding area RE1 in the order of winning without distinction between the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315. -The special figure execution area is stored in the 8th special figure reservation area RE8, and the special figure hit / miss information is stored in the order of winning regardless of whether the game ball is won for the first starting port 314 and the game ball is won for the second starting port 315. By shifting to AE, the special figure game for the special figure hit / miss information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a so-called MAX8 with respect to the holding and holding digestion (execution of the special drawing game) of the special drawing hit / miss information.

The normal number random number storage area 412c is a random number counter C4 per normal symbol acquired by the MPU 41 at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319 and the ball entry sensors 318a and 319a detect the passage of the game ball. This is a storage area in which the counter value (random number value) of is stored. The counter values (random number values) of the random number counters C4 for each of a plurality of ordinary symbols are not stored in the random number storage area 412c, and the ordinary symbols change at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Through gate 318, provided that it is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), the jackpot game is not executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operating. , 319 Every time the game ball passes, the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is stored. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lottery for a normal symbol is not held as in the big hit lottery. Further, when the count value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired, the counter value of the random number value counter CIN2 per ordinary symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the special figure game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is output to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when the game effect is executed.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment may be considered in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and a motor driver 39c are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, the voice output from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit. It is also possible to control the blinking mode of 27 and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern and the effect type based on, for example, the variation pattern command, and transmits the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variable display of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command is a big hit lottery and the lottery result indicates a deviation, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, if the variable pattern command is a big hit lottery and the lottery result shows a big hit, the combination of the main symbols according to the big hit type is displayed. When the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and when the jackpot game start command is received, the RAM 512 stores the information on the jackpot game effect. Refer to the information about the stored jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the variation display of the main symbol and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5. ..

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and a voice lamp control device 5 and a symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 has a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a preview effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a missed effect image, and an opening used in a jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as an effect image, an opening / closing execution effect image, and an ending effect image are stored. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, so that the variation display and the effect display of the main symbol are realized.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input / output I / F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal indicating that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to obtain a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built-in. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal whose ON / OFF is switched at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means to be charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the running control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 24. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing, etc. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining the detection state of the sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a and the like is determined. At this time, when the passage of the game ball is detected by any of the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal symbol per random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal symbol per random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, the counter value is set to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes a start winning process (step S1004) associated with winning a prize in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the firing control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to enable. On the other hand, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes the through gate process. In the through gate process, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, the MPU 41 is stored in the random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. Update the stored information. The details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 15, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 14 will be described.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting openings 314 and 315 based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra and 315a. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the start ports 314 and 315 (steps S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the start ports 314 and 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the special figure hold number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (8 in the present embodiment). Here, if the hold number N is the maximum hold number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special figure winning / failing information in a high-priority empty holding area among the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 of the special figure holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 14, and a variable type counter updated in step S1302 in the main process of FIG. 17 to be described later. The counter values with CS1 are acquired, and the counter values (numerical information) are sent to the high-priority empty holding area among the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8 in the RAM 412. Store as. Further, in the MPU 41, based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a, the starting prize this time is for any of the left first starting port 314L, the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315. In addition to specifying whether or not there is, the start port information for the specified start ports 314 and 315 is stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 as special figure hit / miss information. Further, the MPU 41 turns on the game state (mode A to mode E) in the reserved game for which numerical information has been acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928 and S1931 of the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flag (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is used as the special figure pass / fail information in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure. Store in the hold area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the content of the special figure hit / miss information before the special figure hit / miss information acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determining whether the jackpot is correct or not in S1802 or S1803 of the special figure change start process of FIG. 22 described later. Confirm and execute the hold command setting process to set the hold command based on this confirmation result. When the process in step S1105 is completed, the start winning process is terminated and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

[Through gate processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the through-gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described. In the through gate processing, it is monitored whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, the normal symbol hits the normal symbol random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 317a and 318a. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 (S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1202, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318 and 319 (S1201: Yes). S1201: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 is displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (LED lamp of the normal symbol display 373) based on the flag of the normal symbol fluctuation display set to be turned on in step S1412 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. Determine if the pair is blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through-gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the lottery per normal symbol during the variable display of the normal symbol, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is operating based on the electric accessory operating flag set to be turned on in step S1508 of the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG. 19, which will be described later. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is in operation (S1203: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not normally execute the lottery per symbol while the electric support member 36 is operating. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not operating (S1203: No), the process shifts to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. Whether or not the jackpot game is in progress is determined based on, for example, whether or not the jackpot gaming state flag set to be on in step S1907 of the game state transition process of FIG. 23 is set to on. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is in progress (S1204: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery during the jackpot game, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the process shifts to step S1205.

In this embodiment, the operation of the normal symbol winning lottery and the electric support member 36 is stopped during the jackpot game, but the normal symbol winning lottery and the electric support member 36 are stopped only in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The operation may be stopped, or the normal symbol per lottery and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening / closing execution modes. That is, in the ending, the lottery per normal symbol and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
When the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the MPU 41 is a random number counter C4 per normal symbol. The counter value (random number value) of (step S1205) is acquired (step S1205), the counter value (random number value) is stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through-gate process is terminated. That is, in order to perform a lottery for a normal symbol to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 on the condition that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and the jackpot game is not in progress. Acquires the random value of and stores the random value.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the process of steps S1301 to S1308 is executed as a periodic process of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process of steps S1309 to S1311 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. Further, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been generated in the variable winning opening 316b based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the main processing. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display unit 341 to display the number of payouts of the game balls (ball payout display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol control process. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 operates the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. A winning lottery will be held. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a normal electric accessory control process. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 for an operating time according to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure gaming state. The details of the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process for controlling a game in a variable game. The details of the special figure game control process will be described later, but in the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the change pattern command required for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 is the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1311. Based on each value, a variation pattern command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is set in the RAM 412, and the variation display of the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 of the main display unit 37. And control the stop display.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, an open / close execution mode for controlling the open / close of the open / close door 316c is executed. In this open / close execution mode, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316b is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. As a result, the player can acquire a large number of game balls in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening), at the start of the open / close execution mode, at the end of the open / close execution mode (at the start of the ending), and at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending). ) Etc. are set with various flags and commands. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an open / close execution mode start command, and an open / close execution mode end command in the RAM 412 according to the progress of the jackpot game, and sets a jackpot game start flag and a jackpot game. Controls the on / off of flags such as the end flag, open / close execution mode start flag, and open / close execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the determination result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special figure change start process of FIG. 22 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state and the mode A to the mode E when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that it is not the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: No), until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. To.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1309.

[Ordinary symbol control processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 hits the normal symbol whether or not to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. Along with performing a lottery, it controls the variable display of ordinary symbols.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal number random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. When the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal number random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 has a counter value (random number value) stored in the normal number random number storage area 412c. ) Is deleted (step S1402), and the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal number random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1413.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the lottery per normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol low probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13C). When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol low probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13C). The process proceeds to step S1404. On the other hand, the MPU 41 is a case where it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, one of modes B to E, and the lottery per normal symbol is performed in the normal symbol high probability hit / miss table (FIG. 13 (D). ), The process proceeds to step S1407.

<Steps S1404-S1406>
When it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the non-time saving mode in the normal symbol variation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving mode, and is set as a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a lottery per normal symbol based on the low probability hit / miss table of the normal symbol (see FIG. 13C) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a hit depending on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c is 199.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win (step S1406: Yes), the process shifts to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (step S1406). : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
When it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is any of modes B to E, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display counter to the counter value of the time saving mode. Is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the time saving mode, and is the time during which the game ball passing through the first through gate 318 can win the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. For example, it is set to about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a lottery for each normal symbol based on the normal symbol high probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13 (D)) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a hit depending on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c is 0 to 198.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win (step S1409: Yes), the process shifts to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (step S1409). : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
When it is determined that the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410). ). The flag for hitting a normal figure is referred to in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1503 of the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG. 19 described later.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373), further sets the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol to ON (step S1412), and controls the normal symbol. End the process. The normal symbol variation display started here is the fluctuation of the normal symbol set according to the mode type when the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes 0. After the display time has elapsed, the stop display is displayed in step S1415 described later.

<Step S1413>
When the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol set in step S1404 or step S1407. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S1413). When the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1414, and when the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process is shifted to step S1418. ..

<Step S1414>
When it is determined that the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to ON (step S1414). .. The flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal figure indicates whether or not the normal symbol is changing, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to ON when the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1414: Yes). , It is judged whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the normal symbol. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1415 when the normal map variation display flag is set to on (step S1414: Yes), and when the normal map variation display flag is set to off (step S1414: Yes). No), the normal figure control process is terminated.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
When the counter value of the fluctuation counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), it is the stop display timing of the normal symbol, so MPU41 Is to stop and display the normal symbol by turning on or off the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 clearly indicates the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol in step S1405 or S1408 by the stop display symbol of the normal symbol. Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal map fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal symbol is changing to off (step S1416), and sets the normal map fluctuation stop flag to on (step S1417). The normal figure fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been stopped, and whether or not it is the timing to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1501 of the normal electric accessory control process described later. Referenced to determine.

<Step S1418>
When the counter value of the fluctuation counter of the normal symbol is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the stop display timing of the normal symbol, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is concerned. End the control process.

[Ordinary electric accessory control processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory control process executed in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 as the ordinary electric accessory for the operating time according to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal map fluctuation stop flag set to be turned on in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. 18 is set to ON, that is, at the timing of operating the electric support member 36. Determine if it exists. When the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1502), and shifts the process to step S1503. On the other hand, when the normal map fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
When the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1502), and whether or not the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to on. Is determined (step S1503). The normal symbol hit flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504 when the normal figure hit flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), and when the normal figure hit flag is set to off (step S1503: Yes), the corresponding The normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
When the normal figure hit flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is any of mode A to mode C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is any of modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 is used to short-operate the electric support member 36 as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. The value is set (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value in the case of short-circuit operation is a value corresponding to, for example, 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode type is neither mode A to mode C (step S1504: No), that is, in mode D or mode E, the electric support is used as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. A value for long-term operation of the member 36 is set (step S1506), and the process shifts to step S1507. The initial value in the case of long operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory operating flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory operating flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is operating, and in order to determine whether or not to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position in step S1511 described later. Referenced.

Here, when the operation of the electric support member 36 is started, the electric support member 36 moves to an operating position protruding from the game board 31, and the right first starting port 314R is covered by the electric support member 36 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9). B) See). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is restricted from winning the right first starting port 314R. On the other hand, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36. When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36, the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Further, the game ball flowing down on the right side of the distribution device 35 can also be received by the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0 when the normal figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1501: No). Determine (step S1509). The electric accessory operation counter indicates the remaining time for the electric support member 36 to operate. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is not operating and the electric support member 36 is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter (step S1510), and ends the normal electric accessory control process. do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36 which is a normal electric accessory is not operating, the MPU 41 has the electric accessory operating flag turned on. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1511). The electric accessory operating flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is operating, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes). It is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether or not it is the timing to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1512 when the electric accessory operating flag is set to on (step S1511: Yes), and when the electric accessory operating flag is set to off (step S1511: Yes). No), the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 limits the game ball from winning the second starting port 315. Further, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory operating flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is operating to off (step S1513), and ends the normal symbol control process.

Here, by returning to the standby position of the electric support member 36, the right first starting port 314R is opened by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 8C). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is allowed to win the right first starting port 314R, but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game ball released from the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the second starting port 315. Further, the game ball flowing down on the right side of the distribution device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and the ball entering the second starting port 315 is restricted.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, as a starting part that triggers a big hit lottery for shifting to a big hit game, a first starting part that allows a game ball to enter without receiving support from an ordinary electric accessory and a first starting part. Some have a second starting part that allows a game ball to enter with the support of an ordinary electric accessory. Further, as a gaming machine, there is also one in which a gaming ball is alternately distributed to a first starting portion and a second starting portion by a distribution device.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35. If this is the case, the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the electric support member 36 is activated. Specifically, when the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is in the standby position without the electric support member 36 operating (see FIG. 8C), the game ball to the right first starting port 314R. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted while the entry of the ball is allowed. Further, when the electric support member 36 is activated and is in the operating position (see FIG. 9B), the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R is restricted, while the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Entering a game ball is allowed. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, in addition to the game ball launched in the right region of the game board 31, the game ball discharged from the distribution device 35 is also guided to the second starting port 315. be able to. As described above, the gaming machine 10 is different from the one in which the gaming ball is distributed to the first starting port and the second starting port by the conventional distribution device. Further, unlike the conventional ordinary electric accessory, the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting port 315, but is also distributed to the second passage 352. Allowing or limiting the entry of the gaming ball into the right first starting port 314R of the gaming ball is performed at the same time. Further, one electric support member 36 can guide the game ball in the second passage 352 and the game ball hit to the right to the second starting port 315. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate with each other to change the ball entry ratio between the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide a gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has a new game property according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36. For example, the electric support member 36 is operated short in modes A to C, while it is operated long in modes D and E (see FIG. 13B), which is the most advantageous mode E for the player as described above. In order to shift to, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a game property having a plurality of barriers having different difficulties. Further, the electric support member 36 is a plate-shaped member and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned effect can be realized at low cost by a simple configuration.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described. In the special symbol game control process, control of the variation display and stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 371 or the second special symbol display 372, the setting of the data of the special symbol hold storage area 412b, and the management of the number of time reductions. Etc. are executed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1601: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated and the gaming machine 10 is not in the jackpot game. In the case (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. For example, whether or not the jackpot game is executed is determined based on the jackpot game execution flag set by the MPU 41 to be on at the start of the jackpot game and turned off at the end of the jackpot game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the variable display, and if the symbol variable display is in progress (step S1602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1603. If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1602: No), the process is shifted to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display is set to ON in step S1810 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 described later, and when the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes). It is determined based on whether or not the special figure variation display flag set to off in step S1605 is set to on.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time since the start of the variable display of the special symbol has elapsed the variable display time determined according to the lottery result in the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the variable display is performed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1604, and if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the special figure game control process is performed. To finish.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variation display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 is the special symbol display 371, 372 in the variation display of the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372. The symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special figure game is stopped and displayed (step S1604). Further, the MPU 41 sets the special figure change display flag to off (step S1605) and sets the special figure change stop flag indicating that the change of the special symbol has been stopped to on (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
When the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b is 0. (Step S1607). Here, when the hold number N is 0 (step S1607: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special game control process. On the other hand, if the hold number N is not 0 (step S1607: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1608.

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1608, the process shifts to step S1609. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol display units 371 and 372 to execute the variation display based on the special symbol accuracy information stored in the special symbol execution area AE, and causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the variation display based on the special symbol accuracy information. The variation start process for setting the variation pattern command to be executed is executed, and the special figure game control process is terminated. The details of the special map fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. In the data setting process, the data in the special figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412 is updated and the process is executed.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds N stored in the special figure hold storage area NA of the special figure hold storage area 412b (step S1701), and further subtracts 1 from the first special figure hold area of the special figure hold storage area 412b. The special figure hit / miss information is moved from RE1 to the special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure hit / miss information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure holding area RE2 special figure winning / failing information is moved to the first special drawing holding area RE1, and the special figure winning / failing information of the third special figure holding area RE3 is moved to the second special figure holding area RE1. Move to area RE2, move the special figure hold area RE4 special figure hold area RE3 to the 3rd special figure hold area RE3, and move the special figure hold area RE5 special figure hold area RE4 to the 4th special figure hold area RE4. Moves the special figure hold area RE6 to the 5th special figure hold area RE5, and moves the special figure hold area RE7 to the 6th special figure hold area RE6. Then, the special figure winning / failing information of the 8th special figure holding area RE8 is moved to the 7th special figure holding area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special figure hit / miss information of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1704 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 will be changed. When the process of step S1704 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to the special figure change start process of step S1609 of FIG.

[Special figure change start processing]
Here, an example of the special figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, the MPU 41 sets the gaming state at the time of acquisition of the hit / miss information to mode C or mode E based on the mode information in the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure hold storage area 412b of the RAM 412. (Step S1801). Here, in the mode C and the mode E, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE is won the jackpot based on the high probability mode hit / miss table. This mode is used to determine whether or not the values correspond to each other (see FIGS. 12 (B) and 13 (B)). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the mode is such that the hit / fail determination is performed based on the high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12B). When the special figure gaming state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a hit / fail determination based on the high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12B) (step S1802). On the other hand, when the gaming state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, when the gaming state is mode A, mode B or mode D, it is based on the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12A). (Step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit. When the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit (step S1804: Yes), the MPU 41 has a counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and a special figure. The jackpot type is sorted based on the start port information (special figure information) included in the hit / fail information, and the process proceeds to step S1806. For example, when the start port information (special figure information) indicates the first start port (first special figure), either the 2R normal jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2. Sort the jackpot types. Further, when the starting port information (special figure information) indicates the second starting port (second special figure), the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot are obtained according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2. Sort the jackpot type to one of. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing determination is not a big hit (step S1804: No), that is, when the lottery result is out of order, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1806 without performing the big hit type distribution (step S1805).

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 performs a lottery result flag setting process for setting a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the winning / failing determination in step S1802 or S1803, and the distribution result of the jackpot type in step S1805. Run. In this lottery result flag setting process, the 2R normal jackpot flag is used when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot 2R normal jackpot, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set when the 2R probability variable jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, and the 5R is 5R when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. When the normal jackpot flag is a 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set, when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set, and when it is off, a miss flag is set. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag are flags that indicate the jackpot type as well as the lottery result, and are shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. In the game state transition process, it is referred to when the game state is changed from the big hit game state to the mode B to the mode E after the big hit game is finished, and it is set to off when the game state is changed to the target mode after the big hit game is finished. The flag. Further, the off flag indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of order, and is set to off in step S1813 described later. Then, in this step S1806, when the lottery result flag is set, the stop display symbol of the special figure display 371, 372 of the main display unit 37 is also set according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern indicating the variation display time of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, and reaches the random number counter C3 and the variation type counter. Determined based on the counter value of CS1. Then, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command in the RAM 412 based on the variation pattern determined in step S1807 (step S1808). This variation pattern command may include the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game. Of course, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery may be set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command without being included in the fluctuation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 5 executes the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special symbol variation display flag to on (step S1810). Here, the special symbol whose variation display is started is stopped after the variation display time (variation pattern) set in step S1807 elapses in the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603: Yes and FIG. 20). S1604). At this time, the special symbol stops at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag set to be on in S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later is set to on, and the time saving flag is turned on. If it is set (step S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1812, and if the time saving flag is set to off (step S1811: No), the special figure change start process is terminated.

<Step S1812>
When the time saving flag is set to on (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the off flag is set to on (step S1812: Yes). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813 when the disengagement flag is set to on (step S1812: Yes), that is, when the result of the pass / fail determination in step S1802 or S1803 is disappointing. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817 when the disengagement flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the disengagement flag is set to on (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the disengagement flag to off (step S1813), and S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. The counter value of the time saving counter set when the time saving flag set to be turned on is set to on is subtracted by 1 (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is 0. (Step S1815). The counter value of the time reduction counter indicates the remaining number of time reductions. The MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to on when the counter value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when the remaining time saving number is 0 and it is necessary to end the time saving mode. (Step S1816), the process proceeds to step S1817. The time saving end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the game state transition process of FIG. 23 in order to determine whether or not the time saving mode is ended. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Step S1817>
The MPU 41 has a time saving flag when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, or when the time saving end flag is set to on (step S1816). Is set to off (step S1817), and the special figure change start process is terminated.

[Game state transition process]
Here, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described. In the game state transition process, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the game state is changed from the special figure game state consisting of modes A to E to the big hit game state including the opening / closing execution mode, and in the big hit game state. After the end of the jackpot game, the process of shifting from the jackpot game state to any of the modes B to E of the special figure game state is executed according to the type of the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state ( See FIG. 13 (A)). Further, in the game state transition process, in the mode B or mode D of the special figure game state, after the special figure game of the upper limit number of times is executed, the process of shifting to the mode A is executed (see FIG. 13 (A)). Since the details of modes A to E have already been described, the description of modes A to E will be omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to be on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 is set to on, that is, the special figure game is completed. It is determined whether or not it is time to shift the gaming state to another gaming state. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1902), and shifts the process to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the process shifts to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbol whose variable display has been stopped is a jackpot. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. Whether or not the lottery result is a big hit is determined by the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation, which are set to be turned on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. It is determined by whether or not one of the jackpot flags is set to on.

When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a big hit (step S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1904, and when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (missing) (step S1903: No). The process proceeds to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag set to be turned on in step S1917 or S1926 described later is set to on. The time saving flag indicates that the time saving mode is limited in number of times. When the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to on (step S1904: Yes), that is, when it is a big hit in mode B or mode D, the time saving flag is turned off in order to end the time saving mode for a limited number of times. (Step S1905), and the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to off (step S1904: No), that is, when it is a big hit in mode A, mode C or mode E, the process shifts to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, and further sets the jackpot gaming state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game state flag indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and is referred to, for example, in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 16 to determine whether the jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to off (step S1908) and sets the mode type flag to off (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates which of the modes A to E is the mode type in the special figure game state, and is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot game state in this step S1908. Set the existing mode type flag to off.

The mode type flag is set to be ON in step S1912 and is a mode A flag, is set to ON in step S1919 and is a mode B flag, and is a mode B flag. A mode C flag that is set to ON and indicates that it is in mode C, a mode D flag that is set to ON in step S1928 and indicates that it is in mode D (see FIG. 24), and is set to ON in step S1931. It also includes a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating that it is in mode E.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 has whether or not the time saving end flag set to be turned on in step S1816 of the special figure change start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. Is determined (step S1909). The time saving end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbol games has been executed in the time saving mode with a limited number of times (the remaining time saving number is 0), and is a flag for ending the time saving mode.

When the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1910. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to off (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without shifting to the mode A.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to on (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to off (step S1910). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the mode type from mode B or mode D, which is a time saving mode, to mode A (step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag on (step S1912) and sets the mode B flag or mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to the mode A to off (step S1913), and the game state. End the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 is set to on in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set to on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to shift to any of modes B to E when the jackpot game ends.

When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1914: Yes), the jackpot game end flag is set to off (step S1915), and the process proceeds to step S1916. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game end flag is set to off (step S1914: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without performing the transition from mode B to mode E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag set to be on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the completed jackpot game is a 2R normal jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S1916: Yes), and processes when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S1916: No). To step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 sets the time saving flag indicating that the time saving mode is limited to a limited number of times to on. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of time reductions as a time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to on (step S1919). Further, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to off (step S1920), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag set on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the completed jackpot game is a 2R probability variation jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1922 when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to on (step S1921: Yes), and processes when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off (step S1921: No). To step S1925 of FIG. 24.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
In step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode C and sets the mode C flag to ON (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to off (step S1924), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag set to be on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the completed jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S1925: Yes), and processes when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S1925: No). To step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 sets the time saving flag indicating that the time saving mode is limited to a limited number of times to on. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of time reductions as a time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to on (step S1928). Further, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to off (step S1929), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
In step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E and further sets the mode E flag on. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1914: Yes), and both the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 5R normal jackpot flag are set to off (steps S1916, S1921, and S1925). It can be determined that either the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to the mode E, which is the transition destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot game and the 16R probability variation jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON to off (step S1932), and ends the game state transition process.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 has an operation button operation detection process (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), a counter update process (step S2003), and a command determination process (step). S2004), the special figure game effect processing (step S2005), and the jackpot game effect processing (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
In the operation detection process of step S2001, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes, for example, a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process in step S2002, the MPU 51 sets, for example, an operation pattern flag according to the operation state for the operation button 20 from the operation history for the past three times. With this operation pattern flag, the operation state for the operation button 20 can be determined. Examples of the operation state include a start state of the operation for the operation button 20, a continuation state of the operation for the operation button 20, an end state of the operation for the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation for the operation button 20 is not performed.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process of step S2003, the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, sets the counter value to 0. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value on the fluctuation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp that the remaining variation display time, the decorative symbol is changing, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S2004, the MPU 51 determines a command received from the main control unit 4 and executes a process corresponding to the command. For example, examples of the command received from the main control device 4 include a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but the description of these commands will be omitted.

The variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is used in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 22 based on the information stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b when the variation display of the special symbol is started on the special symbol display units 371 and 372. It is set in step S1808. When the MPU 51 receives the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 determines the special figure game effect and the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like according to the content specified by the variation pattern command.

The hold command is a command indicating the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number N in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b increases. The hold command is set in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b when the number of holds N increases.

The shift command is a command indicating that the special figure winning / failing information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8 has shifted when the number of holdings N decreases. be. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

[Special figure game production process]
In the special figure game effect processing of step S2005, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game effect determined when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is transmitted to the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. Let it run.

[Big hit game production process]
In the jackpot game effect processing of step S2006, in the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, and ending effect) determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The speaker 26, the lighting unit 27, and the like are used to execute the command.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a conventional gaming machine provided with a distribution device for distributing game balls to a first starting portion and a second starting portion having a function different from that of the first starting portion. Unlike the machine, a first starting port 314 having the same function is arranged below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with an ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in the conventional gaming machine, the electric support member 36 is downstream of the stage 310 where game balls are collected when hitting to the right. It extends in a series between the side and the lower part of the exit of the game ball in the second passage 352 (above the right first starting port 314R), and is formed in a plate shape having a delay portion 364. As a result, the electric support member 36 enables the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 at the time of left-handed strike and distributed to the second passage 352 to win a prize at the second starting port 315, and at the same time, the stage at the time of right-handed strike. It is possible to make the game balls collected in 310 win a prize in the second starting port 315. In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or limits the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, and at the same time limits or limits the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R, depending on whether or not it is activated. Tolerate. That is, unlike the ordinary electric accessory of the conventional gaming machine, the electric support member 36 limits the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 315, so that the winning of the gaming ball to the right first starting opening 314R can be achieved. On the other hand, by allowing the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 315, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting opening 314R is restricted. Further, the gaming machine 10 includes, as a special figure gaming state, a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability variation mode (mode C), and a time saving probability variation mode (mode E) adopted in the conventional gaming machine, but distribution. By cooperating with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the playability in the latent probability change mode (mode C) is improved.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed strikes are encouraged in modes A and C, and when left-handed strikes are made, gaming balls enter the distribution device 35, and these gaming balls enter the first passage 351. And the second passage 352 are alternately distributed. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and by hitting right-handed, the support by the electric support member 36 can be received for a long time and with high frequency, and the second special figure game until the game shifts to the jackpot game state. Only special figure games are executed. That is, in mode E, the ball entry ratio to the second starting port 315 is 100%, as in the time-saving probability variation mode of the conventional gaming machine in which the high-probability mode is executed by hitting right without using the distribution device 35. Is.

Then, in the mode A, the game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. Further, since the mode A is not the time saving mode, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins a prize in the right first starting port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. That is, in mode A, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, but the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 is the first start port 314 (left). Win a prize in the first starting port 314L or the right first starting port 314R). Therefore, in the mode A, the ball entry ratio to the first starting port 314 is 100%, substantially the same as in the normal mode of the conventional gaming machine.

On the other hand, in mode C, as in mode A, left-handed strikes are encouraged, and when left-handed strikes are made, game balls enter the distribution device 35, and these game balls enter the first passage 351. When the game balls are alternately distributed to the second passage 352 and the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls are awarded to the left first starting port 314L. Further, since the mode C is a time saving mode unlike the mode A, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are restricted from entering the right first starting port 314R by the electric support member 36 operating. As a result, the second starting port 315 wins a prize. That is, in mode C, by hitting left, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 by the distribution device 35. Therefore, although the mode C is a latent probability change mode, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 (left first start port 314L) and the second start port 315, and the first start port (left first start port). The ball entry ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50% unless the result of the lottery per drawing is out of order.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the mode A (expected value is 0%), the mode C (expected value is 50%), and the mode C (expected value is 50%) in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. It has three gaming states of mode E (expected value is 100%). Therefore, it is possible to create a new game playability with improved playability based on three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 are different. In particular, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as MAX8, the hold is exhausted in the order of winning. Therefore, in mode C, the jackpot lottery at the first starting port 314 and the jackpot lottery at the second starting port 315 are alternated. With a probability of 1/2, you can receive a jackpot type distribution by winning a prize at the 2nd starting port 315, and with a probability of 1/2, you can receive a jackpot type distribution by winning a prize at the 1st starting port 314. Can receive.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming balls distributed to the second passage 352 enter the right first starting port 314R in the mode A, while entering the second starting opening 315 in the mode C. Ball. This is because the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position where the electric support member 36 is not operating. 2 The entry of the game ball into the start port 315 is restricted, and when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the entry of the game ball into the right first start port 314R is restricted, while the second start is performed. This is realized by arranging the electric support member 36 so that the game ball can enter the mouth 315 and making the operating time of the electric support member 36 different between the mode A and the mode C. .. As described above, the electric support member 36 not only allows or limits the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315, but also allows or limits the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 352 to the right first starting port 314R of the game ball distributed to the second passage 352. Allow or limit the entry of game balls at the same time. That is, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate to change the ball entry ratio of the game ball between the right first start port 314R and the second start port 315 in the mode A and the mode C. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36.

Then, in the gaming machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided in the electric support member 36 that guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 315, so that the player is, for example, in a gaming state (mode A or mode C) in which left-handed strike is encouraged. Even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 due to a right-handed strike, the delay guide 364 can secure a long time for the game ball to reach the second starting port 315. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the electric support member 36 from reaching the second starting port 315 from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the return to the standby position. By eliminating the advantage of hitting right in the state, it is possible to make the player positively hit left.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same configurations and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above. The following description will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing procedure of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second to Sixth Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, a case is described in which a special symbol game is executed in any one of the five gaming states of modes A to E, which is configured as a loop probabilistic machine of the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, in the second to sixth embodiments, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the second to sixth embodiments will be described individually.

<Second embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol game is executed in any one of the three gaming states of mode A, mode C, and mode E. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the special figure gaming state does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for a limited number of times. Further, since the special figure gaming state is composed of three modes A to C, the mode transition is also different from the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 26C is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 26 (D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26 (A) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. That is, also in the present embodiment, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is divided into either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the second starting opening 315 is won. 2 The jackpot in the special figure game is divided into 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot. Of course, the distribution of the jackpot types may be different from the first embodiment described above, and for example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be appropriately changed.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of the three modes A, mode C, and mode E, and the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the contents of the first embodiment described above. The same applies to the above, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode C, and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26 (C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, the mode A is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. If the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the mode C is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. That is, after the end of the jackpot game executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, in the case of a normal jackpot, the mode A is entered, and in the case of a probability variation jackpot in winning a prize for the first starting port 314L, 314R. It shifts to mode C, and in the case of a probable change jackpot in winning a prize for the second starting port 315, it shifts to mode E.

FIG. 26D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 25% for 2R normal jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot. It is 75%. Therefore, the mode A basically shifts to the mode A or the mode C after the jackpot game ends, and the transition probability to the mode A is 25% and the transition probability to the mode C is 75%.

In mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are alternately executed by performing a left-handed strike. Further, as described above, the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 25% for the 2R normal jackpot and 75% for the 2R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for the 5R probability variation jackpot, 50% for the 16R probability variation jackpot, and 25% for the 5R normal jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to shift from mode C to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the jackpot game ends, and the transition probability to mode A is 25% and the transition probability to mode C is 37.5%. , The transition probability to mode E is 37.5%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for the 5R probability variation jackpot, 50% for the 16R probability variation jackpot, and 25 for the 5R normal jackpot. %. Therefore, the mode C basically shifts to the mode A or the mode E after the jackpot game ends, and the transition probability to the mode A is 25% and the transition probability to the mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition process]
Here, since the game machine 10 does not execute the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for a limited number of times, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 27, in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. When the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to ON is set to ON (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 relating to the time saving flag in the game state transition process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 23). ) Is omitted, and if the lottery result is out of order, the game state transition process is terminated without performing the mode transition.

On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), and when the jackpot game end flag set to be on in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on (step S1900: No). Step S1914: Yes), the jackpot game end flag is set to off (step S1915), and a process of shifting from the jackpot game state to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E is executed (step S1915). S2001 to S2009). Hereinafter, steps S2001 to S2009 will be described.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state. It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot set on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. ..

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode A in the special figure gaming state (step S2002), sets the mode A flag to on (step S2003). ), The process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the process proceeds to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
When the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by whether or not the 5R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON.

When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode C in the special figure gaming state (step S2005), and sets the mode C flag to on (step). S2006), the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: No), the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
The MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot when the lottery result is neither a normal jackpot (step S2001: No) nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: No). Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode E of the special figure game state (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to ON (step S2008), and shifts the process to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the mode type flag is set to on (steps S2003, S2006 and S2008), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to off (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to on among the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to off. When the jackpot type flag is set to off, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special game state is composed of three modes, mode A, mode B, and mode E, and there is no time saving mode (mode B, mode D) for a limited number of times as the time saving mode. If the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the mode A shifts to the non-time saving mode after the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stay ratio in the time saving mode is lower than that in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, since the time saving mode is a mode in which a game ball can be expected to win a prize in the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the transition to mode E is expected. can. Therefore, since the stay ratio in the time saving mode is low, it is difficult to shift to the mode E, which is the time saving mode, and it is easy to fall into the mode A. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a sharpness to the mode transition and also has a sharpness to the prize balls that the player can obtain.

In this embodiment, the case of three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E has been described, but in the case of three modes, the three modes of mode A, mode B and mode D, mode A, mode B and There may be three modes of mode E, or three modes of mode A, mode C and mode D. Further, the special gaming state may be 4 modes or 6 modes or more. As an example when the special gaming state is 4 modes, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode E, mode A, mode B, mode There are four modes, D and mode E.

Further, the special figure gaming state may include modes other than modes A to E. For example, the special figure gaming state includes, in addition to the modes A and E, a fine time reduction mode in which the number of time reductions is limited, for example, the number of time reductions is about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. May be good. The fine time reduction mode may include a difficult support minute time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is difficult to receive, and an easy support minute time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is easy to receive. The difficult support minute time saving mode shifts to after the big hit game for the big hit in mode A, and the easy support minute time saving mode shifts to after the big hit game for the big hit in the difficult support minute time saving mode. Further, the mode A shifts to the mode A after digesting the special figure game a predetermined number of times in the minute time reduction mode, and the lottery result is a big hit in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315 in the mode E. In some cases, the game shifts after the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed. The gaming machine 10 having four special gaming states including such a difficult support minute time reduction mode and an easy support minute time reduction mode can be used as a jackpot hit / fail table so that it can fall from mode E to mode A, for example. It is preferable to configure it as ST or V-ST having an upper limit on the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed based on the table.

<Third embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the special figure gaming state is composed of five modes A to E and there is no upper limit to the number of continuations of the probability variation jackpot has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E, and the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12 (A)). It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the number of jackpots from the so-called first hit, which is a jackpot, continues up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine in which the special figure gaming state is configured as three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode E.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30 focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 28A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 28B is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 28C is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 28 (D) is a diagram showing a mode transition example, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in step S1609 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20, and FIG. 30 is FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of a main process.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 28 (A) defines the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the first embodiment described above, there are three types of jackpots in this embodiment: 2R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variation jackpots. However, when the number of jackpots from the first hit reaches the upper limit, the jackpot is treated as a normal jackpot, and after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). Is forcibly shifted to the mode A in which the above is performed.

In addition, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is distributed to either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 2R probability variation jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot is 75:25. be. That is, in the jackpot in the first special figure game, there is no distribution of the 16R probability variation jackpot that can be expected to acquire a large amount of game balls, and the distribution of the 2R probability variation jackpot that the expected value of the acquired game ball is small is large. You cannot expect to get a lot of game balls. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 is distributed to either the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot is 50:50. be. That is, in the jackpot in the second special figure game, there is no distribution of the 2R probability variation jackpot, and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be acquired.

As shown in FIG. 28B, the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of the three modes A, mode C, and mode E, and the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the contents of the first embodiment described above. The same applies to the above, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode C, and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28 (C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the jackpot for the number of jackpots set at the time of the first hit is won, and the mode A is entered after the end of the final jackpot game. Until the jackpot for the number of jackpots set at the time of the first hit is won, the player does not fall into mode A unless the remaining number of jackpots stored in the RAM 412 is erased. In addition, except after the end of the last jackpot game, mode C is entered after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first start opening 314, and the prize is given to the second start opening 315. The mode E is entered after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special figure game is completed.

FIG. 28D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, as described above, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second starting port 315, and the first special figure game is executed by winning a prize in the first starting port 314. Therefore, from mode A, an irregular case. Except for, the mode shifts to 100% mode C. Since the mode A shifts to the mode A after the end of the last jackpot game, the mode A does not shift to the mode A after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the mode A.

In the mode C, the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 and the second special drawing game by winning the second starting port 315 are alternately executed by performing a left-handed strike. Therefore, except after the end of the last big hit game, in the case of a big hit in the first special figure game, the mode C is entered after the end of the big hit game, and in the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315. In the case of a big hit, the mode E is entered after the big hit game is completed. Further, in mode C, since the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately, the transition probability to the mode C is 50% and the transition probability to the mode E is 50% except for irregular cases. Is 50%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so that mode E shifts to mode E after the jackpot game is completed.

[Special figure change start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special figure variation start process is different from the special figure variation start process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above, steps S1811 to S1817 relating to the time saving flag and the time saving counter are omitted. Then, when the special figure change display flag is set to ON (step S1810), the game state transition process is terminated. Further, the special figure variation start processing of the present embodiment includes a step S1805 for sorting the jackpot type and a variation pattern setting process (step S1807) in the special figure variation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. In place of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type flag and the special figure type that is the target of the big hit lottery are set. The difference is that the flag is set (steps S2101 and S2102), and the step of monitoring the number of probable change jackpots (steps S2103 to S2107) is executed. Further, since the present embodiment does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for which the number of times is limited, as the special figure gaming state, in the special figure variation start processing of the present embodiment, the special figure of the above-mentioned first embodiment is included. Hereinafter, steps S2101 to S2107 in the fluctuation start processing will be described.

<Step S2101>
The MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag (step S2101) when the jackpot type is sorted (step S1805). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets either the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to ON according to the jackpot type distributed in step S1805. In this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 in the first embodiment described above, the deviation flag required for counting the number of time reductions is set. Not done.

<Step S2102>
The MPU 41 sets a special figure type flag that specifies the special figure type that is the target of the jackpot lottery (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to on when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure game is a big hit, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game. When is a big hit, set the second special figure big hit flag to on.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining set number M with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in the next step S2104 is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not this jackpot is the first hit. When the remaining set number M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial set number Mmax as the remaining set number M (step S2104), and shifts the process to step S1807. The initial set number Mmax is, for example, a predetermined number of sets from the range of 3 to 10 times.

On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the remaining number of sets M is not 0 (step S2103: No), 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of sets M (step S2105), and whether or not the remaining number of sets M after the subtraction is 0. (Step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. The MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag on when the remaining number of sets M after subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, when the jackpot this time is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. (Step S2107), the process proceeds to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot has been won the number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104, that is, the current jackpot is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in step S2202 in the game state transition process of FIG. 30, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to shift to mode A. Further, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON when the remaining number of sets M after subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, when the jackpot this time is not the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S1807.

[Game state transition process]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for a limited number of times, as the special figure gaming state, the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 30 is described above. In the gaming state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the step related to the time saving mode is omitted, and the step of shifting to the mode B and the mode D is omitted. Further, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, when the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot is the final jackpot, the mode A is entered, and the jackpot lottery that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state is performed. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it shifts to mode C or mode E according to the above (steps S2201 to S2212). Hereinafter, steps S2201 to S2212 will be described.

<Step S2201>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is set to on in step S2101 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. The jackpot type flag is set to off (step S2001). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag, which is set to on among the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, to off when the jackpot game ends.

<Steps S2202 to S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot limit flag set to be ON in step S2105 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to ON (step S2202). That is, in the MPU 41, the jackpot game is the final jackpot with respect to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 29, and the mode A in the special figure game state after the jackpot game is completed. Determine if the jackpot limit flag for transitioning to is set to on. When the jackpot limit flag is set to on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to off (step S2203) and shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode A (step S2204). The A flag is set to ON (step S2205), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S2206 to S2009>
In the MPU 41, the jackpot limit flag is set to off (step S2202: No), and the first special figure jackpot flag set to be on in step S2102 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to on. It is determined whether or not it is present (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition of the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

In the MPU 41, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to on (step S2206: Yes), the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2207), and the mode C in the special figure gaming state is set. (Step S2208), the mode C flag is set to ON (step S2209), and the game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2010.

<Steps S2210 to S2212>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special figure jackpot flag is set to on, so that the second special figure jackpot flag is turned off. At the same time as setting (step S2210), the mode E is shifted to the special figure game state (step S2211), the mode E flag is set to on (step S2212), and the game state transition process is completed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode E in which the special figure gaming state has different advantages for the player, and the number of big hits from the first hit is predetermined. Continue up to the specified maximum number. The mode transition destination of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment differs depending on whether it is a jackpot in the first special figure game or a jackpot in the second special figure game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, with the remaining number of sets after the first hit (initial number of sets Mmax-1), in mode E where a large amount of game balls can be expected to be acquired, how many sets of jackpots are left. It is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having a game-like property of shifting to or after shifting to mode E, how many can be distributed to 16R jackpot games.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the first special figure game in mode A, 100% shifts to mode C after the end of the big hit game, but in the case of a big hit in the first special figure game in mode A. Mode C may be entered at a fixed rate, for example, 50%, and mode A may be looped at the remaining rate. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game property in which mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player, may loop, and as a result, a large amount of games are left with a large number of jackpots when shifting to mode C. Not only the game nature of how to shift to mode E where you can expect to acquire game balls, but also the game nature of how to shift to mode C where you can expect to shift to mode E while leaving a large number of big hits. 10 can be provided.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the mode A, the mode C'and the mode E', which are high-probability modes and a limited number of time-saving modes in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is likely to be a big hit, are set as the special figure game state. There are 3 modes including. Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine in which all of the jackpot types have probable variable jackpots, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game machine 10 shifts to a time-saving mode (mode C'or mode E') for a limited number of times.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 31 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 31 (D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special figure game due to the winning in the first starting port 314 is distributed to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the winning in the second starting opening 315. The jackpot in the second special figure game is distributed to the 16R probability variation jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, all the jackpots are probabilistic jackpots, and the jackpot types are sorted according to the special figure type. Of course, in the distribution of jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate. It is also conceivable that they will be sorted according to the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 31 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C'and mode E'. The content of the mode A is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. Mode C'and Mode E'are the same as Mode C and Mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are time-saving modes with a limited number of times. That is, the mode C'and the mode E'are high-probability modes in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery has a high probability of becoming a big hit and a time-saving mode in which the number of times is limited. Here, the upper limit of the number of time reductions in modes C'and E'is set to be about the same as the upper limit of the number of time reductions in mode B and mode D of the above-mentioned first embodiment, and is, for example, 50 times. Then, the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E', mode C', and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31 (C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in the mode C'and the mode E', the mode A shifts to the mode A. If the lottery result is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the mode C'is transferred to the mode C'after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. When the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the mode E'is transferred to the mode E'after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. That is, after the end of the time-saving mode for a limited number of times, the mode C'or the mode E'is dropped to the mode A, and the mode is changed to the mode C'in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot in winning the first starting port 314L, 314R. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot in the winning of the starting port 315, the mode is changed to E'.

FIG. 31 (D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 100% for the 2R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, the mode A shifts to the mode C'after the end of the big hit game executed with the big hit as a trigger.

In the mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed strike. Further, as described above, in the first special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 16R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, from mode C', if the lottery result becomes a big hit by the end of the time saving mode, the game is shifted to either mode C'or mode E'after the big hit game executed with the big hit as a trigger. To. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in the mode C', the mode C'is shifted to the mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and since the 16R probability variation big hit is 100% in the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game, the jackpot is from mode E'. After the end of the big hit game executed with the above as an opportunity, the mode shifts to mode E'. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode E'shifts to mode A.

[Game state transition process]
Here, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that there are two types of jackpots, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. , One of the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and the miss flag is set as the lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure gaming state has three modes of mode A, mode C'and mode E', in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the above-mentioned first mode is used. The processing for mode transition is different from the gaming state transition processing (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2301 to S2308). Hereinafter, steps S2301 to S2308 will be described.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, when the time saving mode ends and the mode C'or mode E'shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 is set to the mode C'flag or mode. Set the E'flag to off.

<Steps S2302 to S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 has a jackpot game state flag and a time saving when the jackpot game end flag set to be on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on. When the flag is set to off (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. .. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot.

The MPU 41 is special when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2302: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the 2R probability variation jackpot. Figure The game state shifts to mode C'(step S2303), and the mode C'flag is set to on (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to off (step S2305), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
The MPU 41 is special when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off (step S2302: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the 16R probability variation jackpot. Figure The game state shifts to mode E'(step S2306), and the mode E'flag is set to on (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to off (step S2308), and ends the game state transition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to shift to the mode E'which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the mode C'. That is, in order to shift to the mode E', it is necessary to make a big hit in the second special figure game after shifting to the mode C'at the first hit and before the end of the time saving mode. Since the first hit in mode A and the jackpot in the first special figure game in mode C'are 2R probability variation jackpots, a small amount of game balls can be obtained in the jackpot game and stay in mode A and mode C'. During that time, the number of game balls cannot be expected to increase. On the other hand, in the mode E'when hitting to the right, a 100% 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained, so a large amount of game balls can be expected to be acquired in the jackpot game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after shifting to mode C'after the first hit, how quickly the jackpot can be obtained in the second special figure game and the mode E'can be expected to acquire a large amount of game balls. It is possible to provide a game machine having a game property, and further having a game property of how many jackpots are acquired and a large number of game balls are acquired in the time saving mode after shifting to the mode E'.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, unlike the above-mentioned first embodiment, the present embodiment has three modes of the special figure gaming state, mode A, mode C'and mode E', as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to a limited number of time-saving modes after the completion of the probabilistic jackpot game on the condition that the game ball wins in the V winning opening of the special variable winning device in the specific round of the probabilistic jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35 (A), 35 (C) and 35 (E) are the game machines 10 shown in FIG. 34. 35 (B) and 35 (D) are plan views showing the main parts of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36 (A) is a jackpot classification table. 36 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 36 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 36 (D) is a diagram and a diagram showing an example of mode transition. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are procedures of the open / close execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. A flowchart showing an example, FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31. The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b.
As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (D), the special variable winning device 82 closes the introduction port 821 for introducing the game ball 99 into the inside of the special variable winning device 82, and the introduction port 821. A movable tongue portion 822 that is moved back and forth with respect to the game board 31 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31 is provided between the position and the open position that opens the introduction port 821. As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), when the movable tongue portion 822 is in the standby position and the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822, the game ball 99 is a special variable winning device. It is not introduced inside the 82. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (D), when the introduction port 821 is opened due to the movable tongue portion 822 being in the open position, the game ball 99 is inside the special variable winning device 82. Can be introduced in. In the state where the special variable winning opening 39 is not operated, the introduction opening 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened by operating the movable tongue portion 822 in the V winning round described later in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (E), a movable claw portion 823, a V winning opening 824, and a normal winning opening 825 are provided inside the special variable winning device 82. Each of the V winning opening 824 and the normal winning opening 825 is provided with a ball winning sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these winning sensors that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 or the normal winning opening 825. Will be done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the left inclined position for guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and the right inclined position for guiding the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. Will be done. In the state where the special variable winning opening 39 is not operated, the movable claw portion 823 is in a left inclined state and stands by in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824. Then, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round described later in which the special variable winning device 82 is operated, the movable claw portion 823 changes from the left tilted state to the right tilted state. It is rotated. Further, when the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left tilted state and stands by in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824.

As shown in FIG. 36 (A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is sorted into a 4R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the first to fourth round games are executed as a game in which a game ball is won against the variable winning opening 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins the game ball is not executed. .. Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 824, and the mode does not shift to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, for example, from the first round to the fourth round, the game is executed as a game in which a game ball is won for the variable winning opening 316b (see FIG. 4), and the fifth round game is a V prize. Performed as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, the player may shift to the time saving mode after the jackpot game is completed by winning the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 824 of the special variable winning device 82 in the fifth round game. can. Further, by executing the 5th round game as a V winning round game, whether or not the 5th round game, which is a V winning round game, is executed after the end of the 4th round game, is a 4R normal jackpot or 5R. You can know if it is a probabilistic jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by executing a promotion effect (including a failure effect) after the end of the four-round game.

On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 is distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot. In the 10R probability variation jackpot game and the 16R probability variation jackpot game, a specific round game is regarded as a V winning round game. The specific round game may be at least one, and may be two or more. Further, when the jackpot type in the mode E'is a 10R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are regarded as a specific round game. By doing so, it is possible to know whether or not there are 11 rounds after executing the V winning round game, that is, whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot after the end of the V winning round game. Can be done. Therefore, after the execution or completion of the 10-round game, the promotion effect from the 10R probability variation jackpot to the 16R probability variation jackpot can be executed to enhance the interest of the game. As for the distribution of jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 36 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C'and mode E'. The content of the mode A is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. Further, in the mode A, since the first special figure game is executed by hitting the left side, the probability change expectation degree when the lottery result becomes a big hit in the mode A is 50%. Mode C'and Mode E'are the same as Mode C and Mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are time-saving modes with a limited number of times, and are the same as the fourth embodiment described above. .. Further, in mode C', the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 by hitting left, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result becomes a big hit in mode C'is It is 75%. In the mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting the right side, so that the probability change expectation degree when the lottery result becomes a big hit in the mode E'is 100%. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are three modes having different probabilistic expectations, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E', mode C', and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36 (C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C'and mode E', when the lottery result is 4R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result is the probability variation jackpot. In this case, when the jackpot game is completed without the game ball 99 winning in the V winning opening 824, the mode A is entered. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the mode C'is transferred to the mode C'after the jackpot game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 wins in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E'is transferred to the mode E'after the jackpot game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game.

FIG. 36 (D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 50% for 4R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. It is 50%. Therefore, the mode A shifts to the mode A at a rate of 50% and the mode C'at a rate of 50% after the jackpot game ends.

In the mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed strike. In addition, as described above, in the 1st special figure game, 50% is distributed to the 4R normal jackpot and 50% is distributed to the 5R probability variation jackpot, and in the 2nd special figure game, 25% is assigned to the 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. It is sorted by the ratio of. Therefore, from the mode C', if the lottery result becomes a big hit by the end of the time saving mode, the mode A, the mode C', and the mode E'are shifted to after the big hit game ends. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode C'shifts to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for the 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% for the 16R probability variation jackpot. From E', the mode shifts to mode E'after the end of the jackpot game on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', and in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824. If the jackpot game is completed without fail, the mode E'is changed to the mode A.

[Big hit game control process]
Here, in the present embodiment, there are four types of jackpots: 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which are different from the first embodiment described above. In the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the start process, the 4R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, the 10R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the miss flag are used as the lottery result flags according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Is set. Then, in the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game ball can be entered into the variable winning opening 316b or the special variable winning device 82 according to the jackpot type. Executes a control for performing a jackpot game in which a round game is executed multiple times.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag set to be on in step S2600 of the game state transition process of FIG. 40, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process shifts to step S2402, and when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 specifies the jackpot type (step S2402) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 10R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag) set to be turned on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. Flag) is identified based on whether it is set to on.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a V winning round that operates the special variable winning device 82 according to the number of rounds of the probabilistic jackpot (step S2404). ), The process proceeds to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as a V winning round in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, and sets 10 rounds as a V winning round in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403: No), the process shifts to step S2405 without setting the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, the MPU 41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 10R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag) set on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. Then, the number of round games R to be executed in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round game number R to "4" when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, and sets the round game number R to "5" when the 5R probability change jackpot flag is on, and sets the 10R probability change. When the jackpot flag is on, the round game number R is set to "10", and when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is on, the round game number R is set to "16" and stored in the RAM 412. As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game having a round game number R according to the jackpot type in the opening / closing execution mode control process in step S2416 described later. Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to ON (step S2406), and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2407 described later to determine whether or not to start timing the opening time.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set to be on in step S2406 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening has been started. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2408 when the opening flag is set to on (step S2407: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2415 when the opening flag is set to off (step S2407: No). Transition.

<Step S2408>
When the opening flag is set to on (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time is being clocked, which will be started in step S2409 described later (step S2408). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2410 when the opening time is being timed (step S2408: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2409 when the opening time is not being timed (step S2408: No).

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts timing the opening execution time and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time at which the timekeeping is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the opening and shift to the open / close execution mode in step S2410 described later.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which timing is started in step S2409 has reached a predetermined predetermined time required for executing the opening. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2411 when the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), and when the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the jackpot game control process. To finish.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
When the opening time has reached a predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the timing of the opening time (step S2411), and sets the opening flag to off (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the open / close execution mode flag on (step S2413) and sets the one-round start flag on (step S2214). The open / close execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode process in step S2415 described later. Further, the one-round start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the first round of the open / close execution mode in step S2501 of the open / close execution mode process of FIG. 38, which will be described later.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode flag set to be on in step S2413 is set to on. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2416 when the open / close execution mode flag is set to on (step S2415: Yes), and processes when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (step S2415: No). To step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes the open / close execution mode control process. In the open / close execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. The details of the open / close execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to be turned on in step S2524 in the open / close execution mode control process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, is set to on. When the ending flag is set to on (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2418, and when the ending flag is set to off (step S2417: No), the jackpot game control process. To finish.

<Step S2418>
When the ending flag is set to on (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time is being clocked, which will be started in step S2419 described later (step S2418). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2420 when the ending time is being timed (step S2418: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2419 when the ending time is not being timed (step S2418: No).

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts timing the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time timed in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the ending (big hit game) in step S2420 described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which the timing is started in step S2419 has reached a predetermined predetermined time required for executing the ending. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2421 when the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the jackpot game control process. To finish.

<Steps S2421 to S2423>
When the ending time has reached a predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag set to on in step S2524 in the open / close execution mode control process of FIG. 39 described later to off (step S2421). ). Further, the MPU 41 ends the time counting of the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to on (step S2423), and ends the jackpot game control process. As a result, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the game state transition process of FIG. 41, and the MPU 41 is the jackpot type when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes). The game state is changed from the jackpot game state to any of mode A, mode C'and mode E'according to the above.

[Open / close execution mode control process]
In the open / close execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type as described above.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the one-round start flag set to be on in step S2414 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start the open / close execution mode (whether or not to start the first round in the round game). When the 1-round start flag is set to on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2506 after setting the 1-round start flag to off (step S2502). On the other hand, when the 1st round start flag is set to off (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening opening flag set to be on in step S2510 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2511 of FIG. 39 when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to on (step S2503: Yes), and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2503). : No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device operation flag set to be on in step S2508 of the open / close execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is in operation. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2514 of FIG. 39 when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to on (step S2504: Yes), and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2504: Yes). S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2503: No) and the special variable winning device activation flag is set to off (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the interval time to be set exceeds a predetermined predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is a pause time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game. That is, in this step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to end the interval and start the round game. When the MPU 41 determines that the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process shifts to step S2506, and when it is determined that the interval time does not exceed the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the interval The opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
When the interval time exceeds a predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game to be started is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 (step S2505: Yes). Step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is a V winning round (step S2506: Yes), the special variable winning device 82 is activated (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue portion 822 of the special variable winning device 82 from the standby position for closing the introduction port 821 to the open position for opening the introduction port 821. Further, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to ON (step S2508), and ends the open / close execution mode control process. The special variable winning device operation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is operating in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
If the round game to be started is not a V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game to be started is a round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened. By operating the 316c, the variable winning opening 316b is opened (step S2509). Further, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening opening flag to ON (step S2510), and ends the opening / closing execution mode control process. The variable winning opening opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the variable winning opening device 316 is operating (whether or not the variable winning opening 316b is open) in step S2503 described above.

<Step S2511>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 of FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied. .. Specifically, in the MPU 41, has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning opening 316b was opened, or has the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 316b exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9)? Judge whether or not. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2512 when the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied (step S2511: Yes), and when the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is not satisfied. (Step S2511: No), the open / close execution mode control process is terminated in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning opening 316b.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by returning the opening / closing door 316c (step S2512), and further, the variable winning opening is closed. The release flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
When the special variable winning device activation flag is set to ON (step S2504: Yes in FIG. 38), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 of the special variable winning device 82. To judge. Whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 is determined based on a detection result by a ball entry sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 824. In the special variable winning device 82, since the variable claw portion 393 is tilted to the left at the start of operation, the game ball first introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is the variable claw portion 393 in the left tilting state. Is guided to the V winning opening 824. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on (step S2515), and the variable claw portion 393 of the special variable winning device 82 is tilted to the left. It is rotated from the state to the right tilted state (step S2516). That is, in the MPU 41, when the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 is confirmed, the gaming ball introduced in the special variable winning device 82 is guided to the normal winning opening 825 by the variable claw portion 393 in the right tilted state. ..

<Step S2517>
When the game ball has not won in the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: No), or when the game ball has won in the V winning opening 824, the V winning flag is set to ON and the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the right. When activated in the state (step S2514: Yes and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is started (after the introduction port 821 is opened by starting the operation of the movable tongue portion 822). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls introduced in the special variable winning device 82 (total number of game balls won in the V winning opening 824 and the normal winning opening 825) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 9). .. When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2518 and the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. If is not satisfied (step S2517: No), the open / close execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue portion 822, and returns the movable claw portion 823 to the left tilted state, and when the operation of the next special variable winning device 82 starts, the game is played. The ball is guided to the V winning opening 824. Further, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to off (step S2519), and shifts the process to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2513) or when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to off (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts the round game number R stored in the RAM 412 by 1. After that (step S2520), it is determined whether or not the round game number R after subtraction is "0" (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the previously completed round game is the final round game in the open / close execution mode. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2523 when the subtracted round game number R is "0" (step S2521: Yes), and when the subtracted round game number R is not "0" (step S2521: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
When the number of round games R after subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts timing the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and the open / close execution mode control process is started. To finish. The interval time at which timing is started in step S2522 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG. 38 to determine whether it is time to activate the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
When the number of round games R after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 is executed because it can be determined that the previously completed round game is the final round game in the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode flag is set to off (step S2523) to end the mode, and the ending flag is set to on (step S2524) to end the open / close execution mode control process. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition process]
Here, in the present embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22, a lottery is performed according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. As a result flag, one of a 2R probability variation jackpot flag, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and a missed flag is set. In this embodiment, the flowchart regarding the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start processing is omitted. Further, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, the big hit game state flag is set to on in step S1906, and then the big hit game start flag is set to on (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that the jackpot game is started, and is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure gaming state has three modes of mode A, mode C'and mode E', in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the above-mentioned first mode is used. The process for mode transition is different from the game state transition process (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2601 to S2610). Hereinafter, steps S2601 to S2610 will be described.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, when the time saving mode ends and the mode C'or mode E'shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 is set to the mode C'flag or mode. Set the E'flag to off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to be turned on in step S2515 of the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 when the jackpot game is terminated (step S1914: Yes and steps S1915 and S1917). Is set to on (step S2602). When the V winning flag is not set to ON (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to mode A in the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2604). ), The process proceeds to step S2610. That is, if the MPU 41 is a 4R normal jackpot, or if there is no winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round in the probability variable jackpot game, the mode A that is neither the time saving mode nor the high probability mode after the jackpot game ends. To migrate to.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the V winning flag is on (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 41 is set to turn on the 5R probability variation jackpot flag set to be on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure change start process of FIG. 22. It is determined whether or not the flag has been set (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variable jackpot. When the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C'in the special figure gaming state (step S2606), and further sets the mode C'flag to ON. (Step S2607), the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the MPU 41, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the time saving mode and the high probability after the end of the jackpot game. The mode shifts to mode C', which is a mode.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability change jackpot flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 is turned on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure change start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that either the 10R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag set to is set to ON, the mode E'of the special figure gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state (step S2608). Further, the mode E'flag is set to on (step S2609), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the MPU 41, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the time is shortened after the jackpot game is completed. Shift to mode E', which is a mode and a high probability mode.

<Step S2610>
The MPU 41 is a jackpot type flag set to be turned on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22, that is, a 4R normal jackpot flag, a 5R probability variation jackpot flag, a 10R probability variation jackpot flag, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. The flag is set to off (step S2610), and the game state transition process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to shift to the mode E'which is most advantageous to the player, after shifting to the mode C'which is distributed with a probability of 50% at the first hit, the time saving mode is set to the mode C'. By the end, it is necessary to win a big hit in the second special figure game, which is distributed by the distribution device 35 with a probability of 50%. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of the probability variation jackpot is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C', and 100% in mode E', except when the mode falls due to the end of the time saving mode, and there are three stages. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a probability variation rate.

In the present embodiment, a case where a special variable winning device 82 having a V winning opening 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316 has been described. However, an openable / closable V winning opening 824 is provided in the variable winning device 316 to make a big hit. The V winning opening 824 may be opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C'and mode E'. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine that performs a type 1 game that is a special figure game by the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 and a type 2 game by the feather accessory device. Is.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 43 and 44 are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the feather accessory device 83 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot winning / failing table, FIG. 45 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table at the time of a type 1 jackpot, and FIG. 45 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table. FIG. 45 (D) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 45 (E) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 46 is executed by the main control device 4. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main process to be performed, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46, and FIG. 48 is the special figure game control process of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start process to be executed, FIGS. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a feather accessory device 83 provided on the gaming board 31. The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 43, the vane accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 inside the vane accessory device 83, and a closing position for closing the introduction port 831 (position of the solid line in FIG. 43). ) And the open position (position of the virtual line in FIG. 43) for opening the introduction port 831, the vane portion 832 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). When the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 because the movable wing portion 832 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (B), when the introduction port 831 is opened due to the movable wing portion 832 being in the open position, the movable wing portion 832 can receive the game ball. Is. The game ball received by the movable vane portion 832 can be introduced into the inside of the feather accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable vane 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 315 is a small hit (see FIG. 45 (A)), and the introduction port 831 is operated for a predetermined time. For example, it is opened only for the time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) when 1 to 3 game balls enter the feather accessory device 83. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small hit may be set as appropriate, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 are provided. Each of the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 is provided with a ball winning sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these winning sensors that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. Will be done. The V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 has a solenoid (FIG. 44 (B)) between the closed position (FIG. 44 (A)) in which the V winning opening 833 is closed and the open position (FIG. 44 (B)) in which the V winning opening 833 is opened. It is rotated by a driving means such as (not shown). The V winning opening opening / closing section 835 normally stands by at a closed position that closes the V winning opening 833. For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, the movable vane portion 832 is operated to the open position. When the vane accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operating time of the movable vane 832 in synchronization with the timing, for example, in the E mode by the same number of times as the time reduction, there is a 50% to 80% probability of V winning opening 824. The V winning opening 833 is opened only for the time when the game ball wins.

As shown in FIG. 45A as a jackpot winning / failing table, the jackpot winning / failing table of the present embodiment is not classified into a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. FIG. 12 (A) and FIG. 12 (B)), the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 and the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 are classified. In the first special figure game, three of the counter values (random number values) of the jackpot random number counters from 0 to 738 are jackpots, and the remaining 736 of the remaining 3 to 738 are missed. The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3) in the first embodiment described above, as in the low probability mode. On the other hand, in the second special figure game, as in the first special figure game, three counter values (random number values) of 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random number values) of the jackpot random number counters of 0 to 738 are jackpots. There is a jackpot probability of 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3). That is, regardless of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the big hit in the big hit lottery is the big hit in the first kind game. In addition, 723 pieces from 3 to 735 are small hits, and 3 pieces from 736 to 738 are off. Here, the small hit is a hit in which a two-kind game in which the movable vane portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 is opened for a predetermined time is executed. Then, when the feather accessory device 83 is operated by a small hit and the game ball wins in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, it becomes a big hit in the two kinds of games. That is, in the second special figure game, the big hit in the second type game is the main, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the first type game is low as in the second special figure game. Below, the jackpot in the 1st class game where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot is "1st class jackpot", and the jackpot due to the game ball winning in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is "2nd class jackpot". May be called.

As shown in FIG. 45 (B) as a jackpot type distribution table, one type jackpot is sorted into a 4R time-saving jackpot or an 8R time-saving jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (C) as a jackpot type distribution table, the two-kind jackpot is divided into a 4R time-saving jackpot, an 8R time-saving jackpot, or a 16R time-saving jackpot. Here, the number of time reductions in each time reduction jackpot is set according to the lottery probability in the jackpot lottery, the small hit probability, the operating time of the feather accessory device 83 at the time of the small hit, the operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835, and the like. In this embodiment, the number of times is, for example, 50 times. Further, in the present embodiment, all jackpots are time-saving jackpots for both type 1 jackpot and type 2 jackpot, but the jackpot types are sorted so as to be non-time-saving jackpots at a certain ratio (for example, 20% to 50%). You may. In this case, the probability that the game ball will win in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the end of the time saving mode in mode E'is right-handed without making a special hit such as a stop hit or a twist hit. As long as the above is performed, the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 may be operated so as to be 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. Further, in mode E', the probability that the game ball will win in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the end of the time saving mode is set to substantially 100%, and the number of big hits from the first hit is set to an upper limit. May be. That is, the gaming machine 10 as the type 1 and type 2 mixer according to the present embodiment may be combined with the specifications of the limit machine according to the third embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 45 (D), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C'and mode E'. The contents of the mode A, the mode C'and the mode E'are the same as those in the fourth embodiment described above, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of the mode E', the mode C'and the mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45 (E) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in the mode C'and the mode E'which are the time saving modes, the mode A shifts to the mode A. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode C'is transferred to the mode C'after the jackpot game is completed, and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, the mode is shifted to the mode E'after the jackpot game is completed.

Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the big hit in the first special figure game is one kind big hit, so from mode A After the jackpot game is over, the mode shifts to mode C'.

In the mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by performing a left-handed strike. That is, in the mode C', the first special figure game in which the type 1 jackpot is 100% and the second special figure game in which the type 2 jackpot is the main are alternately executed. Therefore, from mode C', on condition that the time saving mode does not end, there is a probability of approximately 50% (to be exact, a probability slightly higher than 50%) after the end of the jackpot game, and the mode shifts to mode C', which is approximately 50%. (To be exact, a probability of slightly less than 50%) shifts to mode E'. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode C'shifts to mode A.

In the mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting the right side, and the type 2 jackpot is the main, and the type 1 jackpot is performed with a low probability (about 1 / 246.3 in this embodiment). Therefore, from the mode E', after the jackpot game ends, the mode generally shifts to the mode E', and the mode E'is dropped to the mode C'with a low probability. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode E'shifts to mode A. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot in mode E', mode E'may be looped without falling into mode C'.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a jackpot winning / failing table different from that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 45 (A)), and can execute two types of games for operating the feather accessory device 83. , A part of the main process is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment, and the special figure change start process and the game state transition process in the special figure game control process executed as the main process are different.
[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of the present embodiment, the feather accessory device control process is executed between the special figure game control process of step S1306 and the jackpot game control process of step S1307 (step S2701). The details of the feather accessory device control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

[Feather device control process]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the feather accessory device control process, first, in the MPU 41, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to be turned on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 is set to on. Is determined (step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to execute the two-kind game when the special figure game is completed. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S2801: Yes), it shifts the process to step S2802 and determines that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off. In the case (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the feather accessory device operation set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 48, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to on (step S2802). When the MPU 41 determines that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), it can determine that it is the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, so that the process proceeds to step S2803. .. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S2801: No), it can determine that it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, so that the feather accessory device control process is performed. To finish.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
In the MPU 41, when the vane equipment operation flag is set to on (step S2802: Yes), the vane equipment operation flag is set to off (step S2803), and the movable vane portion of the vane equipment 83 is set. The operation of 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable vane operating flag is set to on (step S2805). As a result, in the feather accessory device 83, the introduction port 831 is opened, and the game ball can be introduced into the inside of the feather accessory device 83 by the movable vane portion 832. Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing section 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening / closing section operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced into the inside of the feather accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831 is in a state where the V winning opening 833 can be won. Further, the MPU 41 starts timing the operation time (step S2808). The time counting in step S2808 is for determining whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 to the standby state and close the V winning opening 833 in step S2810 described later, or in step S2814. It is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether it is time to restore the movable vane 832 and close the introduction port 831.

<Step S2809>
The MPU 41 is a V winning opening opening / closing unit set to ON in step S2807 when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S2801: No), that is, when it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83. It is determined whether or not the operating flag is set to on (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2810 when the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to on (step S2809: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to off. (Step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
In the MPU 41, when the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), whether or not the timing time at which the timing is started in step S2808 is for the predetermined first predetermined time. Is determined (step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 to the standby position and close the V winning opening 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the process shifts to step S2813, and when it is determined that the timing time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes). S2810: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 (step S2811). Whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 is determined, for example, by whether or not the game ball is detected by a ball entry sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 (step S2811: Yes), the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on (step S2812), and the feather accessory device control process is terminated. Here, the type 2 jackpot flag indicates whether to execute the jackpot game based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 833, and the jackpot gaming state in step S3005 in the game state transition process of FIG. 49 described later. Referenced by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won in the V winning opening 833 (step S2811: No), the MPU 41 ends the feather accessory device control process without setting the type 2 jackpot flag to ON.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing to close the V winning opening 833, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 to the standby position. (Step S2813), the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to off (step S2814), and the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2815>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the movable vane operating flag set to be on in step S2805 is set to on when the V winning opening opening / closing portion operating flag is set to off (step S2809: No). Determine (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2816 when the movable vane operating flag is set to on (step S2815: Yes), and when the movable vane operating flag is set to off (step S2815: Yes). No), the processing for controlling the vane equipment device is terminated.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the timekeeping time at which the timekeeping is started in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time when the movable vane operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes). (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to return the movable vane portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2817, and when it is determined that the timing time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes). S2816: No), in order to maintain the open state of the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83, the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
When the time counting time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable vane 832 to the standby position and closes the introduction port 831 (step S2817), and the movable vane operating flag. Is set to off (step S2818). As a result, the two-kind game in the case where the lottery result in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 is a small hit is completed. Further, the MPU 41 ends the timing of the operation time of the feather accessory device 83 started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to on (step S2820), and sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to on (step S2820). The object device control process is terminated. The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the feather accessory device 83 has been completed, that is, the type 2 game has been completed, and the two types are shown in step S3003 of the game state transition process of FIG. 49, which will be described later. It is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the game.

[Special figure change start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a type 1 type 2 mixer, the special figure variation start process is different from the special figure variation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. Has a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special figure change start process of the present embodiment is different from the special figure change start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above until the lottery result flag is set. (Steps S2901 to S2908). Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of lottery other than the big hit in the big hit lottery in the second special figure game, there is a small hit in addition to the loss. It is assumed that the case where the steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) relating to the deviation in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the embodiment are small hits is taken into consideration (steps S2909 and S2910). Hereinafter, steps S2901 to S2910 will be described.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special map variation start processing of the present embodiment, when the special map variation is started, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special map game scheduled to be started is the first special map game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines that the first special figure game is to be started (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a hit / fail determination based on the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table (see FIG. 45 (A)) (step S2902), and performs processing. The process proceeds to step S2904. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the first special figure game is not started (step S2901: No), that is, when it is determined to start the second special figure game, the second special figure jackpot hit / miss table (FIG. 45 (A)). A pass / fail determination is made based on (see) (step S2903), and the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2905 when the lottery result is a big hit (step S2904: Yes), and when the lottery result is not a big hit (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small hit or a miss. The process proceeds to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
When the lottery result is a big hit (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 sorts the big hit types based on the special figure big hit table (see FIG. 45 (B)) (step S2905), and shifts the process to step S2908. .. Specifically, the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type to either the 4R time-saving jackpot or the 8R time-saving jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit when the lottery result is not a big hit (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small hit or a miss (step S2906). When the lottery result is a small hit (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to on (step S2907), and shifts the process to step S2908. The feather accessory device operation flag is a flag for operating the feather accessory device 83, and in step S2802 of the feather accessory device control process of FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to operate the feather accessory device 83. Referenced by MPU41. On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit (step S2906: No), that is, when the lottery result is out of order, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2908 without setting the feather accessory device operation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes the process according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), the lottery result flag is set to on. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag on when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 4R time-saving jackpot or 8R time-saving jackpot, and sets the small hit flag on when it is a small hit. , Set the off flag to on if it is off.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 executes a predetermined process (steps S1807 to S1811) in the same manner as in the first mode described above, and then is set to ON in step S2908. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2809). When the miss flag or the small hit flag is set to on (step S2909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the miss flag or the small hit flag to off (step S2810), and shifts the process to step S1815. On the other hand, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to off (step S2909: No), the process proceeds to step S1818. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S1815 to S1818 of the special figure change start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and the special figure change start process is terminated.

[Game state transition process]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probabilistic machine, in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above, at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game). ), It is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and the mode A is shifted to after the time saving mode ends (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a type 1 type 2 mixing machine, the operation of the feather accessory device is performed not only at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game). At the end (at the end of the two-kind game), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and after the time saving mode ends, the mode A is shifted to (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). It is different from the game state transition process of the embodiment. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the game shifts to the jackpot game state triggered by the jackpot of the special figure game (type 1 jackpot), but in this embodiment, not only the jackpot of type 1 but also the feather accessory device It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it shifts to the jackpot gaming state by the two-kind jackpot based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 833 of 83 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the mode transition destination is determined according to the jackpot type (see steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 13A), but in the present embodiment, one type is used. It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a jackpot or a two-kind jackpot (steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Hereinafter, steps S3001 to S3012 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1900: Yes and step S1901), the special figure of FIG. Figure It is determined whether or not the type 1 jackpot flag set to be ON in step S2908 of the variation start process is set to ON (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process to shift to the jackpot gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002 when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small hit or a miss.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the feather accessory device operation flag set to be on in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 48 is set to on. The feather accessory device operation flag indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, that is, the feather accessory device 83 is operated. When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift to the gaming state because the feather accessory device 83 needs to be operated. The game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of whether or not to shift to either mode A, mode C'or mode E'. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
In the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), the feather accessory device operation end flag set to be on in step S2820 of the feather accessory device control process of FIG. 47 is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is set to (step S3003). The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that it is the timing to end the operation of the feather accessory device 83, that is, the timing to return the movable vane portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. be. When the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to off (step S3004), and shifts the process to step S3005. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to off (step S3003: No), the process shifts to step S1914 in FIG.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 is at the timing to end the operation of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3003: Yes and step S3004), the two-kind jackpot flag set to ON in step S2812 of the feather accessory device control process in FIG. 47 is set. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state after the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is completed. The MPU 41 is in the jackpot game state as in the case where it is determined that the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on (step S3005: Yes) and the type 1 jackpot flag is set to on (step S3001: Yes). (Steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the type 2 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3005: No), it is the same as when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No). , Mode A, mode C'or mode E'(steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag set to be on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on. When the process is executed (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the type 1 jackpot flag set to be on in step S2908 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 48 is set to on. .. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game is either mode C'or mode E'in the special figure game state. When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010 when the type 1 jackpot flag is not set to on (step S3002: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C'in the special figure gaming state (step S3007), and further sets the mode C'flag to ON. (Step S3008). That is, the MPU 41 is a time-saving mode and a high-probability mode after the end of the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 alternately. Shift to mode C'where a game ball can enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to off (step S3009), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3006: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E'in the special figure gaming state (step S3006: No). Step S3010), and further, the mode E'flag is set to on (step S3011). That is, the MPU 41 is in a time saving mode and a high probability mode after the end of the big hit game in the case of a two-kind big hit by winning a game ball to the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The game ball shifts to the mode E'where it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag to off (step S3012), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode is changed to mode C'after the jackpot game is completed, and the mode C'flag is set to ON (steps S3007 and S3008). Since the mode E'flag is set to on (steps S3010 and S3011), if the mode A is shifted to by the end of the time saving mode (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), it is turned on in step S3008. The mode C'flag set to or the mode E'flag set to on in step S3010 is set to off.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment changes from mode A to mode C', from mode C'to mode A, to any of mode C'and mode E', and from mode E'in the special figure gaming state. It shifts to either mode A or mode E'. That is, how to continue the time saving mode by the type 1 jackpot or the type 2 jackpot in the mode'C and mode E'which are the time saving modes after the first hit in the mode A and before the fall to the mode A due to the end of the time saving. Has game characteristics. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having a game property similar to that of an ST machine, even though it is a type 1 type 2 mixing machine. Further, in mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be alternately executed by left-handed hitting, while in mode E', the second special figure game is basically executed by right-handed hitting. At the same time, compared to the probability of becoming a type 1 jackpot in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the expectation that the feather accessory device will be activated by the small hit in the second special figure game will be a type 2 jackpot. Is high. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in mode E', there is a lower possibility of falling to mode A due to the end of the time saving mode as compared with mode C', and as a result, it is advantageous for the player to have a big hit. Modes C'and E'will have two modes with different expectations for continuation, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

[7th to 12th embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38 which is alternately rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by the game ball. The gaming machine 10 provided with the distribution device 35 has been described. On the other hand, in the seventh to twelfth embodiments, the configuration of the distribution unit of the distribution device is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the seventh to twelfth embodiments will be described individually with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54.

<Seventh Embodiment>
The distribution device of the present embodiment is common to the first embodiment described above in that it includes a distribution unit that is rotated alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, but the distribution unit is a solenoid or the like. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is rotated alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a driving means (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 38A (distribution unit) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. .. The distribution member 38A is formed in a claw shape, and is rotated by a driving means (not shown) between the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (A) and the left inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (B). It is driven by motion. When the distribution member 38A is located at the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (A), the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is guided to the first passage 351 by the distribution member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is located at the left inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (B), the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is placed in the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38A. Be guided. As a result, the game ball 99 wins the second starting port 315 when it receives the support of the electric support member 36, and wins the right first starting port 314R when it does not receive the support of the electric support member 36. In the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the game ball from being launched so that the game ball enters the second passage 352, for example, the distribution device 35A is made opaque. It is preferable to make the distribution member 38A invisible from the outside.

Further, the distribution member 38A may be driven by the driving means so as to rotate alternately between the left tilt position and the right tilt position, for example, at regular time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distribution member 38A does not necessarily have to be rotated at a fixed cycle, and may be driven to perform a patterned irregular rotation motion, and may be driven to perform a patterned irregular rotation operation for a fixed time or indefinitely with a plurality of different rotation patterns. It may be changed every hour to operate. For example, the rotation pattern that makes it easy to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern that makes it easy to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at regular time or indefinite time. The rotation pattern that makes it easy to enter the first passage 351 is a pattern in which the time when the distribution member 38A stops at the right tilt position is longer than the time when the distribution member 38A stops at the left tilt position, and the distribution member 38A is left from the right tilt position. A pattern in which the speed (time) of rotating to the inclined position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of rotating from the left inclined position to the right inclined position can be considered. When a plurality of rotation patterns are used in combination, the distribution member 38A is rotationally driven so that the game ball 99 is finally distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical value of 1: 1. Is preferable. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is other than 1: 1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the mode C can be configured so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 than the mode B, and vice versa. Further, an entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry sensor detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350, the distribution member 38A is distributed when the distribution member 38A is in the left inclined position. While rotating the member 38A to the right inclined position, it is also conceivable to rotate the distribution member 38A to the left inclined position when the distribution member 38A is in the right inclined position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the driving means, the ratio at which the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily set. It can be accidentally or intentionally biased. As a result, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, which of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 the game ball 99 is guided to, that is, the game ball 99 supports the electric support member 36. In response to this, it is possible to enjoy the game while worrying about whether or not to win the second starting port 315, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution portion is rotated between the right tilting position and the left tilting position by a driving means such as a solenoid, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. In that respect, it is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a different shape of the distribution portion from the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment described above.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (B), the distribution device 35B of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 38B (distribution unit) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. .. The distribution member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or an anchor shape having an arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right tilt position shown in FIG. 52 (A) and a left tilt position shown in FIG. 52 (B). It is rotationally driven to and from the position by a drive means (not shown). The distribution member 38B of the present embodiment is different from the distribution member 38A of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment only in shape, and is the same as the distribution member 38A of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment in other respects. Yes, it has the same effect as that of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. Further, the distribution member 38B of the present embodiment can be redesigned in the same manner as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above.

Further, the shape of the distribution portion that distributes the game ball 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means is the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 51 or the figure. The design is not limited to the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and the design can be changed in various ways. For example, the shape may be the same as or similar to that of the distribution member 38 of the first embodiment described above, and in the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment, a flat plate portion or a bent portion is provided instead of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<9th and 10th embodiments>
The distribution device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments rotates the game ball 99 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by interfering with the game ball 99 as a distribution unit, thereby passing the game ball 99 in the first passage 351. Alternatively, it differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it includes a rotating body that is distributed to any of the second passages 352.

As shown in FIG. 53 (A), in the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the distribution unit of the distribution device 35C is a columnar column that can freely rotate in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as a roller 38C (rotating body) and is arranged directly below the introduction port 350.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53B, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the distribution unit of the distribution device 35D is a wind turbine capable of freely rotating in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as 38D and is located directly below the introduction port 350. The wind turbine 38D has a rotating body 382D fixed by a nail 381D (fixed portion) so as to be freely rotatable. The end of the nail 381D is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the nail 381D is formed of, for example, metal, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since the nail 381D of the wind turbine 38D can be plastically changed, the nail 381D is set to the initial setting position when the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial setting position and the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial setting position. It will be possible to return to. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

Further, also in the game machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, a rotating body such as a roller 38C or a windmill 38D that freely rotates clockwise or counterclockwise due to interference of the game ball 99 is distributed. Since it is adopted as a unit, the ratio of the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the gaming ball 99 is in the first passage 351 and the first passage 351. Since it is possible to enjoy the game while being delighted about which of the two passages 352, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 wins the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. You can improve your interest. Further, when the distribution unit is a rotating body such as a roller 38C or a wind turbine 38D, the player tends to distribute the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the rotating body as the distribution unit (individuals between the gaming machines). It is also possible to read the difference). As a result, the player may find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 352. Will be able to be obtained.

The configuration of the rotating body as the distribution unit is not limited to the columnar roller 38C shown in FIG. 53 (A) and the wind turbine 38D shown in FIG. 53 (B), and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body has a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular column or a square column, a flat cross-section member such as an elliptical column member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, and a plurality of wings. It may be a propeller-shaped member or the like.

Further, the rotating body such as the columnar roller 38C or the wind turbine 38D may be configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating body. In this case, it is conceivable that the rotational drive of the rotating body alternately switches between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction at regular intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily have to switch the rotation direction at regular time intervals, and may switch the rotation direction at irregular patterned time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game ball 99 is distributed between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical value of 1: 1. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be switched so that the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball to 352 is other than 1: 1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the mode C can be configured to drive the rotating body so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 than the mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry sensor detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350, the rotating body is rotated in the direction opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<11th and 12th embodiments>
In the distribution device of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the game ball 99 is passed through the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by the immovable and non-rotatable distribution unit (fixed distribution unit) regardless of rotation or rotation. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is distributed to any of the above.

As shown in FIG. 54 (A), in the distribution device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the top portion 389E is provided directly below the introduction port 350, and distribution is performed as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E. The part is formed. In this mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E, the game ball 99 that interferes with the top portion 389E or its vicinity is distributed to the left and right, so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), in the distribution device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the apex nail 389F (fixed portion) is located directly below the introduction port 350, and is a symmetrical triangle. A distribution portion formed by the nail 38F is formed. In this triangular nail 38F, the game ball 99 that interferes with the apex nail 389F is distributed to the left and right, so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Each end of the triangular nail 38F is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the triangular nail 38F is formed of, for example, metal, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F can be plastically changed, it is possible to return the triangular nail 38F to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 38F deviates from the initial setting position. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 38F.

Further, also in the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, since the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as a mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E or a triangular nail 38F, the gaming ball 99 is used. The ratio of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the gaming ball 99 is in the first passage 351 and the first passage 351. Since it is possible to enjoy the game while being delighted about which of the two passages 352, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 wins the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. You can improve your interest. Further, when the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as a mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E or a triangular nail 38F, the player distributes the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution portion. It is also possible to read the tendency of (individual difference between gaming machines). As a result, the player may find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 352. Will be able to be obtained.

The configuration of the distribution section for distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E shown in FIG. 54 (A) and the triangular nail 38F shown in FIG. 54 (B). The design can be changed. For example, the distribution portion may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, and four or more nails such as a square nail (diamond nail) in which the apex nail is located directly under the introduction port 350. It may consist of a nail or a single nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased.

[Embodiments 13 to 29]
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory has a plurality of delay guides 364 from the wall portion 361 in an inclined shape in which the tip portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. And by arranging these plurality of delay guides 364 in a staggered manner, it was configured so that the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36 could be secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the thirteenth to 29th embodiments, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is secured for a long time by a configuration different from that of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the 13th to 29th embodiments will be described individually with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

<Thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, the delay portion of the electric support member 36, which is an ordinary electric accessory, extends in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 and moving the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is secured for a long time. On the other hand, also in the thirteenth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, the game ball 99 is configured to move in a meandering path by the delay portion in the electric support member as in the first embodiment described above. However, the configuration of the delay portion is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (C). Here, FIG. 55 (A) is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (B) is a plan view of the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. A plan view and FIG. 55 (C) are plan views of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as the delay portion is an equilateral triangle in a plan view, and the right side ( The sloping sides are located on the upstream side), and they are arranged in a staggered pattern as a whole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as delay portions is semicircular in a plan view. It is arranged in a staggered pattern as a whole. In the plurality of delay guides 364A and 364B shown in FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B), the game balls 99 interfere with the delay guides 364A and 364B in the electric support members 36A and 36B, so that the game balls 99 It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

The plurality of delay guides as the delay portions are not limited to those having an equilateral triangle or semi-circular shape in a plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as the game ball 99 can meander. For example, multiple delay guides are formed in squares such as isosceles triangles, right angle triangles, trapezoids, and parallelograms, and are arranged in a staggered pattern so that the inclined sides are located on the right side (upstream side). Is formed into a shape having a parabolic or arcuate outer circumference such as a quadrant, a semi-ellipse, or a quadruple ellipse, and staggered so that the parabolic or arcuate outer periphery is located on the right side (upstream side). It may be arranged or the like.

As shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. Even with such a meandering groove 364C, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering in the electric support member 36C. The shape of the meandering groove 364C as the delay portion can be various as long as it has a groove shape that allows the game ball 99 to meander.

As described above, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the game balls 99 meander in the electric support members 36A to 36C as in the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. By moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), it is possible to secure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C. As a result, also in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player makes a right-handed strike when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the electric power is applied. It becomes difficult to receive support by the support members 36A to 36C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit of the gaming machine 10 from being obtained when the right-handed hit is made in a situation where the left-handed hit is encouraged.

<16th to 29th embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, as the delay portion of the electric support member 36, a plurality of inclined portions extending from the wall portion 361 in a staggered manner and the tip portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing the delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the moving distance of the game ball in the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is increased. Was secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 16th to 29th embodiments, as a delay portion of the electric support member, the game ball is linearly moved in the electric support member, but the residence time of the game ball in the electric support member is long. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is configured so that the above-mentioned can be secured for a long time.

Hereinafter, the 16th to 29th embodiments will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63. However, since the electric support member of these embodiments can also secure a long residence time of the game ball, the above-mentioned embodiment is described above. It has the same effect as that of the first embodiment. That is, if the player makes a right-handed strike while the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, it becomes difficult to receive support from the electric support member. It is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit in the gaming machine 10 from being obtained in the case of hitting.

(16th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A1-A1 cutting line of FIG. 56 (A). be.

As shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B, in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364D extending in a series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. Has been done. The plurality of linear protrusions 364D extend in parallel with each other at regular intervals. Each linear convex portion 364D has a horizontal plane 365D and a vertical plane 366D, and has a uniform cross section of a triangle. In the electric support member 36D of the present embodiment, the horizontal plane 365D is provided, so that the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal plane 365D.

The horizontal plane 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes a pear-skin surface due to embossing and a surface having irregularities due to embossing or the like. Further, the movement resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging the elastic member on the horizontal plane or forming the horizontal plane with the elastic material.

The linear convex portion 364D may be provided with a slightly inclined surface whose left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side) instead of the horizontal plane 365D. In this case, if the tilt angle of the slightly tilted surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the tilt angle of the electric support member 36D with respect to the horizontal, the delay function is exhibited. preferable. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear convex portions as delay portions, and there may be one.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 57 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the support member 36F, and FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The electric support members 36E to 36G of the 17th to 19th embodiments are provided with a plurality of linear convex portions 364E to 364G having horizontal planes 365E to 365G, and the electric support members of the 16th embodiment described above are provided. Common with 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the linear convex portion 364E of the 17th embodiment is provided with an inclined surface 366E in place of the vertical surface 366D of the 16th embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 57B, the linear convex portion 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal plane 365F, but an arcuate surface 366F is provided in place of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. In that respect, it differs from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment. The surface alternative to the vertical surface 366D of the electric support member 36D of the 16th embodiment is not limited to the inclined surface 366E and the arc surface 366F, and may be a surface having another shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and the horizontal plane 365G and the vertical plane 366G are alternately continuous. It is different from the linear convex portion 364D of the 16th embodiment described above. Of course, also in the eighteenth embodiment, instead of the vertical surface 366G, a surface having another shape such as an inclined surface or an arc surface may be adopted.

The linear convex portions 364E, 364F, and 364G of the 17th to 19th embodiments can be changed in the same manner as the 16th embodiment described above.

(20th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36H of the gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A2-A2 cutting line of FIG. 58 (A). ..

The electric support member 36H of the twentieth embodiment shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B) is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

As shown in FIGS. 58A and 56B, in the twentieth embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H extending in a series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend in parallel with each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal plane 365H and a vertical plane 366H, and has a uniform cross section of a triangle. In the electric support member 36H of the present embodiment, the horizontal plane 365H is provided, so that the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed in the horizontal plane 365H. As the linear recess 364H, instead of the horizontal plane 365H and the vertical surface 366H, a surface having another shape may be adopted as in the above-mentioned 16th to 19th embodiments. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear recesses as delay portions, and there may be one.

(21st to 26th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment, and FIG. 59 (B) is an electric support member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the 22nd embodiment. A perspective view, FIG. 60 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 60 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine 10 according to the 24th embodiment. A perspective view showing a main part of the support member 36L, FIG. 61 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36M of the gaming machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 61 (B) is a 26th embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main part of the electric support member 36N of the gaming machine 10 which concerns on a form.

The electric support members 36I to 36N of the 21st to 26th embodiments shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 are provided as a plurality of convex portions 364I to 364N in which delay portions are discretely arranged. It is different from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the 21st embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36I is formed as a plurality of convex portions 364I, and these convex portions 364I are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the 16th embodiment described above (A1-A1 in FIG. 56A). The shape is similar to the cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the 22nd embodiment, the plurality of convex portions 364J having the same shape as the 21st embodiment described above have an orthorhombic grid shape (diamond grid shape, triangular grid shape, etc.). It is arranged in an isosceles grid pattern).

As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the 23rd embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in a square columnar shape, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364K may be formed in a polygonal columnar shape other than a square columnar shape such as a triangular columnar shape and a pentagonal columnar shape, and may be formed in a staggered shape (orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). It may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 60 (B), in the 24th embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364L are formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, and these convex portions 364L are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape in addition to a quadrangular pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape and a pentagonal pyramid shape, and may be formed in an oblique grid shape (diamond grid shape, triangular grid shape, isosceles grid shape). It may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), in the 25th embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364M are formed in a columnar shape, and these convex portions 364M are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern.

As shown in FIG. 61B, in the 26th embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern.

The plurality of convex portions 364M of the 25th embodiment and the plurality of convex portions 364N of the 26th embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic grid pattern (diamond grid pattern, triangular grid pattern, isosceles grid pattern). Further, instead of the plurality of convex portions 364M and the plurality of convex portions 364N, a plurality of convex portions having other shapes such as a conical shape and a conical trapezoidal shape may be discretely arranged.

It should be noted that the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions do not necessarily all have the same shape, and a plurality of convex portions having different shapes may be arranged in combination, or may be combined with the linear convex portion or the linear concave portion. It may be arranged. Further, the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged so as to have regularity other than the grid pattern, or may be randomly arranged without regularity.

(27th and 28th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 62 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the 27th embodiment, and FIG. 62 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the 28th embodiment. It is a perspective view.

The electric support members 36O and 36P of the 27th and 28th embodiments shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O and 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. In that respect, it differs from the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the electric support member 36O of the 27th embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each recess 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O having a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the 16th embodiment described above (A1-A1 cutting in FIG. 56A). The shape is similar to the cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 62B, in the electric support member 36P of the 28th embodiment, as the delay portion, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recess 364O of the 27th embodiment described above are oblique. They are arranged in a square grid pattern (diamond grid pattern, triangular grid pattern, isosceles grid pattern).

The shape of the plurality of recesses as the delay portion can be variously changed, for example, a polygonal columnar shape such as a square columnar shape, a polygonal pyramid shape such as a square pyramid shape, a columnar shape, a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, a conical trapezoidal shape, or the like. The bottom surface of the surface may be circular.

Further, the plurality of concave portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have the same shape, and a plurality of concave portions having different shapes may be arranged in combination, and the linear convex portion, the linear concave portion, and the plurality of convex portions may be arranged in combination. It may be arranged in combination with. Further, the plurality of recesses as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged so as to have regularity other than the grid pattern, or may be randomly arranged without regularity.

(29th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the 29th embodiment, and FIG. 63 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 63 (A). be.

The electric support member 36Q of the 29th embodiment shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B) is provided as a plurality of rollers 364Q in which the delay portion is rotationally driven, and is the first embodiment described above. It is different from the form.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), the electric support member 36Q of the 29th embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as delay portions. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller 364Q may be provided. Each roller 364Q is rotatably supported by arranging the rotation axis along the lateral direction of the electric support member 36Q (the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball 99). Further, each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q interferes with the plurality of rollers 364Q, so that a load is applied toward the right side (upstream side). As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, so that the residence time of the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q is secured for a long time.

The outer surface of the roller 364Q may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes a pear-skin surface due to embossing and a surface having irregularities due to embossing or the like. Further, an elastic member may be arranged on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be formed of an elastic material to increase the movement resistance of the game ball.

Further, when the delay portion is configured as a roller, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force may be applied to the game ball 99 via the roller. As a result, the game ball 99 is sucked by the roller, so that the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced. In this case, the roller may be rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction as in the 29th embodiment, but may be configured to be freely rotatable without being rotationally driven by the driving means.

Further, the rollers 364Q have linear convex portions 364D to 364G, linear concave portions 364H, and a plurality of convex portions arranged in a grid pattern, as in the electric support members 36D to 36P of the 16th to 28th embodiments described above. It is also conceivable to use it in addition to the configuration in which 364I to 364N and the recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[Embodiments 30 to 38]
In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. The right first starting port 314R is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314L. The case where it is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 which is the region directly under the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the starting port 314R and the starting port 314R has been described. On the other hand, the thirtieth to 38th embodiments are different from the above-described first embodiment in that one each of the first starting port and the second starting port is provided. Hereinafter, embodiments of the 30th to 38th embodiments will be described individually with reference to the drawings.

<30th embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in the shape of a plate has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape. Further, since the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the thirtieth embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 64 (B) is a diagram of the electric support member 36R. A perspective view, FIG. 65 (A) is a view in the case where the electric support member 36R is in a standby state in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 65 (B) is a sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 65 (A). FIG. 66 (A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 66 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A4-A4 cutting line of FIG. 66 (A).

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. , The right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is a distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region directly below the introduction port 350. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and below the exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 (the second starting port 315). A standby position that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 and an operating position that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315. It is possible to move back and forth between the game boards 31.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is in the region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of a certain ball receiving portion 391. That is, the first starting port 314 of the present embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, and is provided in the game ball 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351. Any of the game balls 99 to be distributed can win a prize in the same first starting port 314. Further, the second starting port 315 of the present embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right from directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 described later, and the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 is provided. The ball is not directly entered into the second starting port 315.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (A) and 64 (B), the electric support member 36R has an inverted shape having a left guide portion 361R (first portion) and a right guide portion 362R (second portion). .. The left guide portion 361R is located below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315. Therefore, the left guide portion 361R can guide the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guide portion 362R extends in a series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. .. Therefore, the right guidance unit 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315. Further, it is preferable that the right guide portion 362R is provided with a delay portion as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in the gaming state in which the electric support member 36R is operated for a short time, when the hitting method (right-handed) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed) is performed, the game ball wins the second starting port 315. It becomes difficult to be done. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of performing a right-handed strike in a gaming state in which a left-handed strike is encouraged, the player can be made to positively strike a left-handed strike.

A penetration portion 363R is provided between the left guide portion 361R and the right guide portion 362R so as to be located above the second starting port 315. The penetrating portion 363R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guide portion 361R can pass through the penetration portion 363R and enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guide portion 362R is the penetration portion 363R. It is possible to enter the second starting port 315 through the above. Further, the electric support member 36R is located in the front-rear direction between the standby position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the second start port 315 and the operating position for allowing the game ball to enter the second start port 315. It is possible to move to. The movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Further, although the electric support member 36R has a different shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the operating conditions and the operating pattern are the same as those of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in modes A to C, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second starting port 315 for a short time. Driven, in mode D and mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit is driven for a long time so that the game ball 99 can enter the second starting port 315. .. It should be noted that the electric support member 36R is operated on condition that the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is detected in the first through gate 318 without performing a lottery per drawing. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31, and the whole is inside the game board 31. Located in. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the first starting port 314 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the left guiding portion 361R. Further, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 falls along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guide portion 362R, and falls from the out port 317. It is discharged. That is, the electric support member 36R allows the game ball 99 to enter the first starting port 314 when it is in the standby position, as in the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. 2 Restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the starting port 315.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the left guiding portion 361R, and the electric support member 36R operates until the game ball 99 reaches the penetrating portion 363R. When in the position, the ball passes through the penetrating portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. Further, when the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the right guiding portion 362R and the electric support member 36R is in the operating position until the game ball 99 reaches the penetrating portion 363R. , Passes through the penetrating portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. That is, the electric support member 36R allows the limitation of the game ball 99 to the first starting port 314 when it is in the operating position, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, while the second one. Allows the game ball 99 to enter the starting port 315. Further, in the electric support member 36R, both the game ball 99 that passes through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 when it is in the operating position and the game ball 99 that is launched into the right region of the game board 31 are second. Allows the ball to enter the starting port 315.

Further, also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the evacuation guide nail 393,394 (evacuation guide portion) is provided on the right side of the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36R in the direction of evacuation from the distribution device 35. That is, when the retracting guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315, whereby the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36R is supported by the electric support member 36R, and the electric support member 36R is used. If the support cannot be received, the ball is entered into the first starting port 314. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 314 by the first passage 351 and the game ball 99 is inserted into the first starting port 314 by the second passage 352. It is possible to take three states, that is, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 depends on the presence or absence of the operation of the electric support member 36R, and the electric support member 36R The operation time and operation frequency of the special figure depend on the mode type of the game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R, but also the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease of entering the second starting port 315 of 99 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

Further, the electric support member 36R of the present embodiment is not only whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315, as in the first embodiment described above, but also the first of the distribution device 35. At the same time, the presence or absence of restrictions on the entry of the game ball 99 passing through the two passages 352 into the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R cooperate with each other to form the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. The ball entry ratio with and can be varied. As a result, Mode A (expected value is 0%), Mode C (expected value is 50%), and Mode E (expected value is 50%) in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. A new game that realizes three game states (100%), reduces the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, and controls the operation of the electric support member 36R. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high degree of interest.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the game ball at the time of right-handed hitting like the electric support member 36 passes above the first starting port 314R and enters the second starting port 315. In this case, if the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first start port 314R, the game ball at the time of right-handed hit may enter the first start port 314. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball at the time of right-handed hit is guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding portion 362R of the electric support member 36R, so that the game ball at the time of right-handed hitting is the first starting port 314. Do not pass above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball when hitting to the right from entering the first starting port 314.

The penetrating portion of the electric support member 36R is not limited to the notch shape opened forward, and may be a through hole opened only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<31st Embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in the shape of a plate has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. Further, since the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the 31st embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B). Here, FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B) are views showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the game machine 10 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S according to the present embodiment. 67 (A) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67 (B) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is open.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. , The right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is a distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region directly below the introduction port 350.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 introduces the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region directly below the mouth 350. That is, the first starting port 314 of the present embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351 are provided. Any of the game balls 99 distributed to can win a prize in the same first starting port 314. Further, the second starting port 315 of the present embodiment is provided inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, which will be described later.

The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the region directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, and has a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31 and a rotatable left and right wing member 3681S. It has 3682S.

The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows rotation of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S and entry of the game ball 99. The upper opening 369S is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right side of the region directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. Further, a second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. The second starting port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352, similarly to the upper opening 369S.

Further, above the upper opening 369S, a triangular nail 31S composed of three nails is provided. The triangular nail 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S in a state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67A). In addition, instead of the triangular nail 31S, the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by one nail, or the entry of the game ball may be restricted by something other than the nail. Further, by reducing the distance between the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 to the electric tulip accessory device 36S in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S If the ball entry can be restricted, the triangular nail 31S may be omitted.

On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a road nail 31M'(induction portion) composed of a plurality of nails is provided through a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. The road nail 31M'is provided so as to incline downward to the left, and guides the game ball 99, which is launched into the right side region of the game board 31 and flows down the right side region, toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Therefore, in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are open (see FIG. 67 (B)), the game ball 99 is guided by the road nail 31M', and the game ball 99 is an electric tulip accessory through the upper opening 369S. It is introduced inside the device 36S, and the game ball 99 is inserted into the second starting port 315. On the other hand, in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67 (A)), the game ball 99 guided by the road nail 31M'enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. Is restricted, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M', and is discharged from the out port 317. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S can be rotated by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed by the drive means. The state (see FIG. 67 (A)) and the open state (see FIG. 67 (B)) in which the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are separated from each other are switched. The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the ordinary electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) causes the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment to open. Correspondingly, the return of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closure of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment.

In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67 (A), the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. I can't ball. That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the entry of the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 into the second starting port 315 is hindered by the left wing member 3681S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is flipped to the left side and falls to the ball receiving portion 391, and is guided to the first starting opening 314 by the ball receiving portion 391 to be guided to the first starting port 314. Win 314. Further, the game ball 99, which is launched into the right side area of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M', collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and the electric tulip accessory device 36S. The ball cannot enter the inside of the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M'as described above, and is discharged from the out port 317. ..

In the open state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67 (B), the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, a prize is given to the second starting port 315. Further, the game ball 99, which flows down the right side region of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M', bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. It is picked up by the right wing member 3682S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and a prize is given to the second starting port 315. That is, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed, the electric tulip accessory device 36S is launched into the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the right region of the game board 31. Any of the game balls 99 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the present embodiment not only has or does not have a restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315, but also distributes the ball, as in the first embodiment described above. At the same time, the presence or absence of restrictions on the entry of the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the device 35 into the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate with each other as in the first embodiment described above. The ball entry ratio between the 1 start port 314 and the 2nd start port 315 can be varied. As a result, Mode A (expected value is 0%), Mode C (expected value is 50%), and Mode E (expected value is 50%) in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. Realizes three game states (100%), reduces the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, and of the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S). It is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation. In particular, when configured as the electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a gaming state (for example, mode A or mode C) in which a left-handed hitting of a game ball is encouraged in the left-hand area of the game board 31, the right-hand area of the game board 31 A delay portion (delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when a right-handed hit is performed to launch the game ball. ) Is not required, and a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be adopted. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has an advantage that the design becomes easier as compared with the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, since only one first starting port 314 is required, one first starting port and one ball entry sensor can be omitted as compared with the first embodiment described above. It is easier to design and is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the first embodiment of the above.

<32nd Embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that a general winning opening having a function different from that of the first starting port is provided directly under the second passage of the distribution device. ..

Hereinafter, the 32nd embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 68 (A). Here, FIG. 68A is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the first starting port 314 is one, but the first starting port 314 is the distribution device 35. It is common with the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the above. The second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 which is a region directly below the introduction port 350, as in the first embodiment described above. Further, the electric support member 36 is continuously provided between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the lower exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, as in the first embodiment described above. It is extended and can be moved in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, below the second passage 352, a general winning opening 313'which has a function different from that of the first starting opening 314 and the second starting opening 315 is provided instead of the first starting opening. That is, the electric support member 36 is in a state in which the general winning opening 313'is opened in the standby position, while the general winning opening 313' is closed in the operating position. Further, the electric support member 36 restricts the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 in the state where the general winning opening 313'is opened in the standby position, while the general winning opening 313' is closed in the operating position. Then, the player is guided to the second starting port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is the first. The ball is entered into the starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is supported by the electric support member 36, and the game ball 99 is entered into the second starting port 315. If the support is not received, the ball will be entered into the general winning opening 313'.

Here, the conventional distribution device for a gaming machine distributes a gaming ball between a first starting portion and a second starting portion, and has a drawback that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is entered into the first starting port 314 and the second passage. A state in which the game ball of 352 is entered into the general winning opening 313'and a state in which the game ball of the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting opening 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. It can take two states. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is inserted into the general winning opening 313'or the second starting opening 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated, and the electric support member 36 The operation time and operation frequency of the special figure depend on the mode type of the game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, but also the game balls 99 that are distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the gaming ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the general winning opening 313', the gaming machine 10 having a new gaming property that cannot be realized by the conventional gaming machine is provided. To. Specifically, for example, in the mode A, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, but the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 has the first starting port 314 and the game ball 99. The ball is entered into the general winning opening 313'without being entered into any of the second starting openings 315. On the other hand, in the mode C as the latent probability change, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315. do. That is, half of the game ball 99 introduced into the distribution device 35 is entered into the starting port (first starting opening 314) and half is entered into the general winning opening 313'in mode A, while half is entered into the general winning opening 313'. In mode C, all the game balls 99 are inserted into the starting openings (half of which is the first starting opening 314 and half of which is the second starting opening 315). Therefore, in the mode C, not only the second special figure game, which is not executed in the mode A, is executed, but also the special figure which is a multiple of the mode A based on the number of game balls entered into the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability change), the chances of receiving a big hit lottery are doubled as compared with mode A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 of a new gaming machine, which cannot be realized by the conventional gaming machine, is provided.

Further, if the number of prize balls is different between the first start opening 314 and the general winning opening 313', the increase / decrease of the game balls in the special figure game is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment. You can also. For example, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 313'more than the number of prize balls for the first starting opening 314, it is possible to impart a gradual decrease in the number of game balls in the special figure game. On the other hand, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 313'smaller than the number of prize balls for the first starting opening 314, it is possible to impart a playability in which the number of game balls in the special figure game is drastically reduced. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain a game machine 10 in which the number of game balls increases or decreases rapidly.

<33rd Embodiment>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 has been described. Further, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, the case where the general winning opening 313'is provided directly below the second passage 352 has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first starting port nor the general winning opening is provided directly under the second passage of the distribution device, and the above-mentioned first embodiment and 32nd embodiment are described above. It is different from the form. In this embodiment, the second starting port is not provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device.

Hereinafter, the 33rd embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 68 (B). Here, FIG. 68B is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (B), the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the first starting port 314 is one, but the first starting port 314 is the distribution device 35. It is common with the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351 and further common with the 32nd embodiment. Further, the present embodiment also has the same as the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment described above for the second starting port 315 and the electric support member 36. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first starting port nor the general winning port is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, a second starting port having a function different from that of the first starting port and the general winning port, a winning port such as a through gate, or the like is not provided. Further, in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is guided to the second starting port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315. Common to the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 falls along the game board 31, and various winning openings It is different from the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment described above in that it is discharged from the out port 317 without winning a prize.

In the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is the first starting. The ball is entered into the mouth 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is supported by the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 is used. If support cannot be received, it is discharged from the out port 317. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314 and the game ball in the second passage 352. Can take three states: a state in which the ball is discharged from the out port 317 and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317 or entered into the second starting port 315 depends on the presence or absence of the operation of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 The operation time and operation frequency of the special figure depend on the mode type of the game state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, but also the game distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease of entering the ball 99 into the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball 99 in the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, so that the gaming ball 99 has a new game property that cannot be achieved by a conventional gaming machine. The gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, but the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317. To. On the other hand, in mode C, which is a latent probability change, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315. Will be done. That is, half of the game ball 99 introduced into the distribution device 35 is inserted into the starting port (first starting port 314) and half is discharged from the out opening 317 in the mode A, while in the mode C, the game ball 99 is discharged. All the game balls 99 are entered into the starting port (half of which is the first starting port 314 and half of which is the second starting port 315). Therefore, in the mode C, not only the second special figure game, which is not executed in the mode A, is executed, but also the special figure which is a multiple of the mode A based on the number of game balls entered into the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability change), the chances of receiving a big hit lottery are doubled as compared with mode A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 of a new gaming machine, which cannot be realized by the conventional gaming machine, is provided.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317 when there is no support by the electric support member 36, but is discharged from the second passage 352 below the distribution device 35. A winning opening may be provided at a distant position so that a game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 can enter the winning opening.

<34th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, so that the electric support member 36 is moved to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the electric support member is slid and moved along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 34th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the electric support member 36T in the standby state, and FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram. A perspective view of the main part of 69 (A), FIG. 70 (A) is a view showing the main part when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position in FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 70 (B) is FIG. 70 (A). It is a perspective view which shows the main part of).

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is a ball directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69A, there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36T is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36T has a plate shape slightly inclined to the left, and can move along the game board 31 along the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T has a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'. It is possible to move between. That is, the electric support member 36T can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed.

As shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, that is, the electric support member 36T is directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the second starting port 315. When located directly above, the electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36T is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36T and discharged from the out port 317. Further, the electric support member 36T forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36T and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the road nail 31M'passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and passes through the gap between the road nail 31M'and the out opening 317. Is discharged from.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (A) and 70 (B), when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', the electric support is provided. The member 36T opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the ball, and allows the game ball 99 moving to the left side of the road nail 31M'to enter the second starting port 315. A bridge between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is second by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (two in this embodiment) as guard portions are arranged on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting port 315 from jumping over the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position. be. That is, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting port 315 collides with a plurality of guard nails 31B without directly entering the second starting port 315 when the moving speed is high or the like. Then, the ball is entered into the second starting port 315.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, the road nail 31M It falls from between'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start opening 315 or discharged from the out opening 317. Whether or not the electric support member 36T is activated depends on whether or not the electric support member 36T is activated, and the operating time and operating frequency of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special drawing gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but also the second passage 352 and the second stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

<35th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, so that the electric support member 36 is moved to the second starting port 315. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment described above is described in that the electric support member can rotate in the direction intersecting the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position (in a substantially horizontal plane). It is different from the form. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 35th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 71. Here, FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 71 (B) is a diagram showing FIG. 71 (A). It is a figure which shows the main part of.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), the electric support member 36U has a plate shape having a pair of wall portions 361U protruding above the edge portion in the width direction, and is slightly inclined downward to the left. Have been placed. The pair of wall portions 361U functions as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the right end (upstream side) end portion 362 to the left side (downstream side) end portion 363. The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotary shaft 362U, and when a rotational force is input to the rotary shaft 362U from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U is shown in FIG. 71 in a plan view. (B) is rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

Further, the electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. The position of the solid line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'(the position of the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B)). It is possible to move between. That is, the electric support member 36U can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed.

When the electric support member 36U is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), that is, the electric support member 36U is directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and at the second starting port 315. When located directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36U is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36U and discharged from the out port 317. Further, the electric support member 36U forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36U and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the road nail 31M'passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and passes through the gap between the road nail 31M'and the out opening 317. Is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is located at the operating position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), that is, when the electric support member 36U is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', it is electrically operated. The support member 36U opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and also allows the game ball 99 to move the road nail 31M'to the left side into the second starting port 315. As a bridge between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is second by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 from the electric support member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position, the road nail 31M It falls from between'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start opening 315 or discharged from the out opening 317. Whether or not the electric support member 36U is activated depends on whether or not the electric support member 36U is activated, and the operating time and operating frequency of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special drawing gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

The electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being tilted with respect to the horizontal plane, and may be configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 36U to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315.

<36th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, so that the electric support member 36 is moved to the second starting port 315. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the electric support member can rotate in the vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. .. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 36th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 72. Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the gaming machine 10 and the electric support member 36V according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 72 (A) shows the electric support member 36V. When in the standby position, FIG. 72 (B) shows the case where the electric support member 36V is in the intermediate position between the standby position and the operating position, and FIG. 72 (C) shows the case where the electric support member 36V is in the operating position. ..

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although omitted in the drawings, there is one first starting port 314 as in the 34th embodiment and the 35th embodiment described above, and this first embodiment. The starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, also in the present embodiment, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316, and the left side of the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315. An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable between the upper part and the upper part. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotary shaft 362V, and when a rotational force is input to the rotary shaft 362V from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36V is along the game board 31. It is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction of FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (C) in a vertical plane. Further, the electric support member 36V is rotated in the vertical plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315 (not shown). It is possible to move between the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (A) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'(the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (C)). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position (the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (A)) in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. It can operate between the operating position (the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (C)). The electric support member 36V is tilted slightly downward to the left in the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 36V, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. You may promote the move to.

When the electric support member 36V is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 72 (A), that is, when the electric support member 36V is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. The electric support member 36V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36V is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36V and discharged from the out port 317. Further, the electric support member 36V forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36V and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the road nail 31M'passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and passes through the gap between the road nail 31M'and the out opening 317. Is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 72 (C), that is, when the electric support member 36V is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36V is started second. The mouth 315 is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and the road nail 31M'and the road nail 31M' are allowed to enter the second starting port 315 of the game ball 99 that moves to the left. 2 Bridging between the starting port 315 and the starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is the first by the electric support member 36V. 2 Moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 from the electric support member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, the road nail 31M It falls from between'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start opening 315 or discharged from the out opening 317. Whether or not the electric support member 36V is activated depends on whether or not the electric support member 36V is activated, and the operating time and operating frequency of the electric support member 36V depend on the mode type of the special drawing gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the electric support member 36V has two stop positions, one above the second starting port 315 and the left side of the road nail 31M'. In addition to these stop positions, FIG. 72 ( The position where the electric support member 36V shown in B) stands up may be set as the operating position to stop. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second starting port 315 and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'are opened at the same time. Therefore, while the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second starting port 315, the game ball 99 flowing down on the right side of the distribution device 35 and the game ball 99 moving on the road nail 31M' The entry of the ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted by the upright electric support member 36V. As a result, in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the electric support member 36V is opened for a short time without providing the evacuation guide portion such as the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394, the right region of the distribution device 35 is formed. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<37th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, so that the electric support member 36 is moved to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric support member can rotate between the standby position and the operating position in the direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane), and can be rotated from above the second starting port 315. It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it has a length dimension extending to the left side of the road nail 31M'. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 37th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. Here, FIG. 73A is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the electric support member 36W at the standby position, and FIG. 73B is a diagram. A perspective view of a main part of 73 (A), FIG. 74 (A) is a diagram showing a case where the electric support member 36W is in the operating position in FIG. 73 (B), and FIG. 74 (B) is an electric support member in the present embodiment. It is a top view which shows the modification of 36W.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73A, there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36W is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate material in a plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a slightly downwardly inclined state. As a result, the electric support member 36W can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M'to the second starting port 315 at the operating position. The electric support member 36W may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to move to the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99. May promote the movement of.

The through hole 363W has a short diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 and allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Further, the through hole 363W is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second starting port when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. It is formed in a place where it can be located directly above 315. The shape of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W is not limited to an elliptical shape, and may be another shape such as a circular shape, an oval shape, or an oblong rectangular shape. The closing portion 364W is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. Located in between.

The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotary shaft 362W, and when a rotational force is input to the rotary shaft 362W from a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36W intersects the game board 31. It is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 73 (B) in the direction of rotation (in a substantially horizontal plane). Further, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and while blocking the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, the through hole 363W is the second starting port 315. The standby position (see FIG. 73 (B)) located between the road nail 31M and the through hole 363W is located directly above the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 to open the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between the operating position (see FIG. 74 (A)) that bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. That is, the electric support member 36W can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed.

When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closed portion 364W of the electric support member 36W is located above the second starting port 315 and the through hole 363W is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'. The electric support member 36W closes the second starting port 315 by the closing portion 364W, and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36W is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36W and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position where the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36W and the road nail 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M'passes through the through hole 363W and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 364W is located. When it is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 by the through hole 363W to allow the game ball 99 to enter the road nail. A closing portion 364W bridges the path nail 31M'and the second starting port 315 so that the game ball 99 moving to the left side can win a prize at the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is second by the electric support member 36W. It moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 from the electric support member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W It passes through and falls from between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left toward the second start port 315 enter the second start port 315. Be balled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start opening 315 or discharged from the out opening 317. Ruka depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36W, and the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36W depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36W, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

In addition, the electric support member 36W replaces the through hole 363W which is opened only up and down, and as shown in FIG. It may be provided.

<38th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, so that the electric support member 36 is moved to the second starting port 315. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is rotatable around a rotation axis inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, and has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M'. , Different from the first embodiment described above. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 38th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. Here, FIG. 75 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the game machine 10 and the electric support member 36X according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 75 (B) is a diagram of the electric support member 36X. A perspective view, FIG. 76 (A) is a sectional view taken along the A5-A5 cutting line of FIG. 75 (B), FIG. 76 (B) is a sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. A) is a diagram showing a main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, and FIG. 77 (B) shows the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modified example of the electric support member 36X in the present embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, there are two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first starting port 314L is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75A, there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 75 (A), 75 (B), 76 (A) and 76 (B), the electric support member 36X has a first penetration portion 361X and a second penetration portion 362X, and the first penetration portion 362X is provided. 2 It has a length dimension extending from above the starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined to the left. As a result, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M'to the second starting port 315 at the operating position. The electric support member 36X may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to move to the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99. May promote the movement of.

The first penetrating portion 361X is defined by a pair of projecting pieces 361aX and 361bX facing each other, and is open to the left side. The first penetration portion 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 by the protruding piece 361aX. (See FIG. 77 (A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315 by penetrating in the vertical direction (see FIG. 77 (A)). See FIG. 77 (B)).

The second penetrating portion 362X is defined by a pair of projecting pieces 362aX and 362bX facing each other, and is open to the right side. Further, the second penetrating portion 362X penetrates in a direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily have to penetrate in the direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 362X, and may penetrate in the direction intersecting the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X is located in the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second penetrating portion 362X is in a state of penetrating in the vertical direction to start the second. Allows the game ball 99 to pass through the gap between the mouth 315 and the road nail 31M'(see FIG. 77 (A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the second starting port is provided by the protruding piece 362aX. The passage of the game ball 99 is restricted between the 315 and the road nail 31M'(see FIG. 77 (B)).

The electric support member 36X is made rotatable around a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first penetrating portion 361X penetrates in the front-rear direction to block the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the standby position (see FIG. 77 (A)) in which the second penetrating portion 363W penetrates vertically between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'and the first penetrating portion 361X An operating position in which the second penetration portion 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction and bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'while penetrating in the vertical direction directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It is movable to and from (see FIG. 77 (B)). That is, the electric support member 36X has a standby position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. 77 (A) is closed, while the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is opened. , It is possible to operate between the operating position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. 77 (B) is opened and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed. ..

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. do. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36X is tilted downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36X and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 can pass through the second penetrating portion 362X in the vertical direction with the road nail 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M'passes through the second penetrating portion 362X and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the path. A bridge is provided between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315 so that the game ball 99 that moves the nail 31M'to the left can win a prize at the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is the first by the electric support member 36X. 2 Moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in this embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 from the electric support member 36U toward the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is provided. Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second penetration It passes through the portion 362X, falls from between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the first penetrating portion 361X of the electric support member 36X opening the second starting port 315. The game ball 99, which is distributed to the second passage 352, and the game ball 99, which moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315, both have the first penetration portion 361X. It passes through and enters the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315, and is not entered from the out opening 317. It can take three states of being discharged. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start opening 315 or discharged from the out opening 317. Ruka depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36X, and the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36X depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36X, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

The electric support member 36X has a through hole 361X that is open only up and down as shown in FIG. 78, instead of the first penetration portion 361X and the second penetration portion 362X that are partially opened not only vertically but also laterally. ', 362X' may be provided, and a through portion that is partially open not only vertically but also laterally and a through hole that is open only up and down may be used in combination.

Further, in the thirtieth to 38th embodiments, one first starting port 314 is provided, but as in the first embodiment described above, two first starting ports are provided and one of the first starting ports is provided. The game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 351 may be inserted by the starting port, and the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 may be inserted by the other first starting port 314L.

Further, in the thirtieth to 38th embodiments, the same configuration as the first embodiment described above can be changed in the same manner as the first embodiment described above, and the second to twelfth embodiments described above can be changed. It is also possible to adopt the configuration of the form (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and the configuration of the modified example thereof. For example, in the thirtieth to thirty-seventh embodiments, the roller 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53 (A)) and the wind turbine 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53 (B)) are used as distribution portions. Such as a rotating body, a mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54 (A)), a triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53 (A)), and a top nail of the triangular nail 38F. A fixed distribution unit such as a single nail can be suitably adopted. When such a rotating body or a fixed distribution unit is adopted as the distribution unit, the player reads the tendency of distribution between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. It is also possible. As a result, the player may find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed to the second passage 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game ball to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 352. Will be able to be obtained.

[Outline of the invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In addition, for the sake of understanding the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals, etc., but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
The first winning opening (314L) into which the game balls distributed in the first passage (351) can enter, and
A second winning opening (315), which is capable of entering a game ball and has a different function from the first winning opening (314L),
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352). ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position where the game ball passing through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (36) that operates at (operating position),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and when the gaming ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not there is an operation, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are restricted from entering the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the ball entry ratio to the second winning opening. As a result, the monotony of the game can be reduced, new playability can be realized according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A2]
An additional note that the game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can be entered, and a third winning opening (314R) having the same function as the first winning opening (314L) is further provided. The gaming machine described in A1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A2, the gaming ball is distributed to the first starting port and the third starting port having the same function as the first starting port by the distribution device. As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the standby position, the game ball is inserted into different winning openings (first winning opening and second winning opening) having the same function, which makes the game more monotonous. It is possible to reduce the number of movements, realize new playability according to the control mode of the movement of the movable accessory member, and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A3]
The additional feature of the movable accessory member (36) is that the operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to A1 or Appendix A2.

[Appendix A4]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
It is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and to detect the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is the detection means (the first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the ball, and the detection means (319) that launches the game ball into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The game state is shifted between a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318), and a plurality of game states including. Further equipped with a game state transition means (41),
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A3 and A4, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the third winning opening by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, even if the movable accessory member is operated, it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter the third winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It is possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the third winning opening. As a result, in a situation where left-handed launching of a game ball into the left side area of the game board is encouraged (for example, in the first game state), it is disadvantageous to the player when right-handedness is performed to launch the game ball into the left side area of the game board. Therefore, in a situation where left-handedness is encouraged, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game by right-handedness and promote the progress of the game by left-handedness.

[Appendix A5]
In the second winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix A4, wherein the detected gaming ball is arranged at a position longer than the time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix A5, the time required for the gaming ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning opening and the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means enter the second winning opening. The time required to make a ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left side area of the game board can enter the second winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right side area makes it difficult to enter the third winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix A6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning opening (315). ), And the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) is restricted from entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix A4 or the appendix A5.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix A5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening when the right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which the left-handed hit is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix A7]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the gaming ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A4 to Supplementary A6, characterized in that it is a time allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix A6, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into the second winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix A8]
Movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S)
In the first position (standby position), the entry of the game ball into one of the second winning opening (315) and the third winning opening (314R) (314R) is restricted, and the one is restricted. Allows the entry of a game ball into the other winning opening (315), which is different from the winning opening (314R) of
At the second position (operating position), the ball is allowed to enter the one winning opening (314R), and the playing ball is restricted from entering the other winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the gaming ball is allowed to enter one of the second winning opening and the third winning opening depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. In the state where the entry of the game ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and the entry of the gaming ball into one winning opening is restricted, while the entry of the gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted. One of the acceptable conditions is achieved. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into one winning opening, but also allows the gaming ball to enter the other winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A9]
The movable accessory member (36) is
An opening / closing portion (362) in which the third winning opening (314R) is opened in the first position (standby position) and the third winning opening (314R) is closed in the second position (operating position). )When,
Continuing from the opening / closing portion (362), the movement of the game ball to the right of the third winning opening (314R) toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the first position (standby position) is restricted, and the first position is restricted. A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the third winning opening (314R) toward the opening / closing portion (362) at two positions (operating positions).
The gaming machine according to the appendix A2, which is characterized by having.

[Appendix A10]
The opening / closing portion (362) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the third winning opening (314R) and enters the second winning opening (315). Limit the ball,
At the second position (operating position), the entry of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) into the third winning opening (314R) is restricted, and the entry into the second winning opening (315) is restricted. Allow the ball,
The guide portion is
In the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right side region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362) is restricted.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9, characterized in that, at the second position (operating position), the gaming ball launched into the right side region of the gaming board (31) is allowed to move toward the opening / closing portion (363). ..

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A9 and A10, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing portion that can open and close the third winning opening and a guide portion that moves the game ball to the right of the third winning opening toward the opening / closing portion. With a simple configuration of providing, it is possible to make a game ball win a prize in the third winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A11]
The movable accessory member (36R) has a first portion (361R) for inserting a gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315), and the second winning opening. The gaming machine according to the appendix A1, wherein the gaming machine has a second portion (362R) for allowing the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315).

[Appendix A12]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first starting port (314).
At the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (315), and the second The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, wherein the portion (362R) allows the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A11 and the appendix A12, the movable accessory member enters the game ball into the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening, and the game from the right side of the second winning opening. With a simple configuration of providing a second portion for allowing the ball to enter the second winning opening, one movable accessory member can make the gaming ball win the second winning opening from a plurality of routes. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A13]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315). Further having a penetration (363R)
The game according to Appendix A11 or Appendix A12, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to be lowered toward the penetration portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A13, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating portion and entered into the second winning opening.

[Appendix A14]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S).
The tips of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other in the first position (standby position), and they are close to each other in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the tip portions of the slingshot machines are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A14, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening and the allowance or restriction of the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening.

[Appendix A15]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is said to be in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved to the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix A14, wherein the passing gaming ball interferes with the gaming ball to move the gaming ball toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A15, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the gaming ball is the first movable accessory member as a movable accessory member in the second passage by the distribution device. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A15, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the second winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A16]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), the ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position).
When in the second position (operating position), any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A9, wherein the ball is allowed to enter.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix A16, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix A17]
Addendum, which is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and further includes a retracting guiding portion (393,394) for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A16.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A17, a retracting guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix A12, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched into the left region of the gaming board, the second winning opening in the movable accessory member. Since the gaming ball can be received at a position away from the ball, it is possible to secure a long time for the gaming ball to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix A18]
The evacuation guidance unit (393,394) includes the plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are arranged in an inclined shape located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix A11.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix A18, the gaming ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Further, in a gaming machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the gaming board, it is possible to provide an evacuation guidance unit when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion, and to make it difficult to receive the support by the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix A19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning opening (315) at the second position, and the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36) is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A18, which has a delay portion (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A19, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the gaming ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if the movable accessory member receives the game ball by the movable accessory member, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the player strikes right, the game ball is caused by the delay portion. Can secure a long time to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position, and thus is not encouraged. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the method is performed.

[Appendix A20]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary A19, wherein the delay portion (364,364A to 364C) moves a gaming ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36,36A to 36C).

[Appendix A21]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) is one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (364D to 364G) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H). 364H) The gaming machine according to Supplementary A19 or Supplementary A20.

[Appendix A22]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is any one of Supplementary A19 to Supplementary A21, characterized in that the delay portion (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P). The described gaming machine.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A22, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A22 and A23, the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay portion having a simple structure. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix A24]
From Appendix A19, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A23.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary A24 or Supplementary A25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) exert a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force on the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A24 to A26, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member is improved. Because it becomes easier to pay attention to, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
Further provided with a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states.
The gaming state transition means (41) has a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning opening (315) is different. The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, which includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to Appendix A27 has three gaming states, that is, a third to fifth gaming state in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix A27, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming property based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. become.

[Appendix A28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314L) and the third winning opening (314R), but is difficult to be entered into the second winning opening (315).
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right area to enter any of the first winning opening (314L), the second winning opening (315), and the third winning opening (314R).
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left area enters the first winning opening (314L), the second winning opening (315), and the third winning opening (314R) as compared with the game ball launched in the right area. Easy to be balled
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314L) and the third winning opening (314R), and the second winning ball is compared with the game ball launched in the left side region. The gaming machine according to Appendix A27, which is characterized by being easily inserted into the mouth (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease of entering the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening depends on the launching area of the gaming ball with respect to the gaming board. different. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix A29]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) operates from the first position to the second position when it is detected by the other detection means (319) that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the ball is detected.
In the fifth gaming state, the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means (318) when the gaming ball is launched into the right side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix A28, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, the movable accessory member operates when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means or other detecting means, so that the gaming ball can enter the second winning opening. To. Then, each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the third winning opening is different.

[Appendix A30]
The first winning opening (314L) and the third starting opening (314R) shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to make the first special judgment (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to let it
The second winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A29, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A30, the entrance of the gaming machine to the first starting port and the third starting opening and the entry of the gaming ball to the second starting opening are shifted to the second special game which is advantageous to the player. Expectations (functions) are different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third starting opening different from each other, it is possible to realize three game states having different expectations to be transferred to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314L), and is easily entered into the second starting opening (315). ) And the third winning opening (314R) is difficult to enter.
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enters the first winning opening (314R) and the second winning opening (315). It is difficult to get a ball, and it is easy to get into the third winning opening (314R).
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314L), and the second winning opening (315L) is easily entered. 315) and the third winning opening (314R) are difficult to enter.
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enters the first winning opening (314R) and the third winning opening (314L). It is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352).
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the gaming ball launched into the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314L) and the third winning opening (314R), and the gaming ball passes through the specific region by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix A30, wherein the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (315) when it is detected.

[Appendix A32]
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, the gaming ball launched in the right side region is the first winning opening (314L), the second winning opening (315), and the third winning opening (314R). The gaming machine according to Appendix A31, which is characterized in that it is difficult to enter any of the balls.

[Appendix A33]
The fifth game state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314L), and the second winning opening (315L) is easily entered. 315) and the third winning opening (314R) are difficult to enter.
The gaming balls launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are awarded to the first winning opening (314L) and the third winning opening (314R). It is difficult to add that the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to A31 or Appendix A32.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A31 to A33, the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different by adopting the distribution device together with the movable accessory member. The game state is realized. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which the game ball is launched in the left area and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is played without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right area. It is possible to realize the progressing fifth gaming state. As a result, the game can be broadened, and at the same time, the game playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix A34]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first special determination and the first, as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A30 to Supplementary A33, wherein the special determination has a high probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

[Appendix A35]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314L) and the third starting opening (314R) is displayed by the first special symbol. The first special symbol display part (371) to execute,
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination is completed. Move to a special game state,
On condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L) and the third winning opening (314R) is to shift to the special gaming state. After the end of the special game in the special game state, the state shifts to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C').
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A34, characterized in that the transition to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is performed after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A34 and A35, for example, a gaming property having a barrier before shifting to a special gaming state in which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuation rates. It will be possible to provide gaming machines with various game features.

[Appendix A36]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
The first determination result (probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, and
The second determination result (normal jackpot) that shifts to a game state other than the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special game state, and
The gaming machine according to the appendix A35, which comprises.

[Appendix A37]
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the fourth game It is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination to shift to the special gaming state as compared with the state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). Move to the 6th game state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed. The gaming machine according to the appendix A36, which is characterized by the above.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A36 and A37, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game and the fifth determination result after the end of the special game. Includes the second determination result that shifts to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Further, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state are more likely to be determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. The player has three gaming states, the third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different, and the first winning opening or the third winning opening. On condition that the result of the first special judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the fourth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the player enters the second winning opening. On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball is to shift to the special game state, the game is shifted to the fifth game state after the end of the special game. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to the probabilistic machine including the so-called loop probabilistic machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to the appendix A36 and the appendix A37, the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is gradually shifted to the fifth gaming state through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. 2 It is necessary to obtain the first judgment result as the result of the special judgment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game-playing machine that gradually shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix A38]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination. The gaming machine according to Appendix A37, characterized in that the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed after the end of the special gaming.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state after the end of the special gaming, so that the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state The rate of stay in the state is low. On the other hand, in the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second winning opening by the support by the movable accessory member, but also the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This mode has a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, by lowering the stay ratio of the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state, the gaming property is easy to fall into the 3rd gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value obtained by the player. We can also provide a well-balanced gaming machine.

[Appendix A39]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination is made. A transition number setting means for setting the upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state based on the first transition to the special gaming state, and
The gaming state transition means (41) is characterized in that it shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special gaming state of the maximum number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix A35.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A39 has three gaming states, the third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first and second winning openings and the third winning opening are different, and the upper limit of the transition. Up to the number, the transition from the first hit to the special gaming state continues. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening or the third winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the fourth after the special game is completed. The fifth game after the end of the special game, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is to shift to the special game state. It is transferred to the state. That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball is triggered by entering the first winning opening or the third winning opening or by entering the second winning opening. Therefore, in the transition opportunity to the remaining special gaming states after the first hit, the playability of how to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving many transition opportunities to the special gaming states. It is possible to provide a gaming machine to have.

[Appendix A40]
In the game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth game state (mode C') or the fifth game state (mode E') is the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to the appendix A35, which is characterized by shifting to the third gaming state (mode A) when the above-mentioned third gaming state (mode A) is reached.

[Appendix A41]
Further provided with a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry portion (824) opened in the special game.
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special in the special gaming in the special gaming state. On condition that the game ball enters the ball entry portion, after the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C').
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C') is to shift to the special gaming state, the special gaming in the special gaming state is described. The gaming machine according to the appendix A40, which is characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the end of the special gaming, provided that the gaming ball enters the special entering portion (824). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A40 and the appendix A41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game is shifted to the first gaming state. To. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to the ST machine including the so-called V-ST machine. Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A40 and the appendix A41, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state in order to shift to the fifth gaming state which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and then in the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. It is necessary that the result of the special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, how quickly the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state in the second special symbol game is obtained, and the transition to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is obtained. Judgment of how many special gaming states are to be transferred before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the fifth gaming state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game-like property of obtaining a result.

[Appendix A42]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314L) or the third winning opening (314R) is displayed by the first special symbol. The first special symbol display part (371) to execute,
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special gaming state. It is possible to enter the game ball by being activated, and the right to shift to the special game state (type 2 jackpot) by the game state transition means (41) is granted by the entry of the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the one that shifts to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), the transition to the special gaming state is performed.
The fourth gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special gaming in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. To
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to shift to the special gaming state (type 2 jackpot) given by the game ball entering the special ball entry unit (833). Move to the special game state and
It is characterized in that the transition to the fifth gaming state (mode E) is performed after the completion of the special game in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the gaming ball enters the special entry portion (833). The gaming machine according to the appendix A34.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming state transition means (41) is described when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A42, which is characterized by shifting to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A42 and the appendix A43, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), or the gaming ball enters the special entry portion. By doing so, the right to shift to the special gaming state is granted (2 types of big hits), and the game shifts to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can also be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. With this as an opportunity, a normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not the movable accessory member (36) is operated between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). ) Further
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are based on the normal determination means (41) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A29 to Supplementary A41, characterized in that the probability that the movable accessory member (36) is determined to be activated in the normal determination is high.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A44, the probability of determining that the movable accessory member is activated in the ordinary determination by the ordinary determination means differs between the fourth gaming state, the fifth gaming state, and the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix A45]
In the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to the appendix A27 to A44, wherein the time from the detection to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A45, in the fourth gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, as compared with the third gaming state. The time to get there is short. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix A46]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is the movable accessory member (36) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'). A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A27 to Supplementary A45, which is characterized by a long operating time.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A46, in the fifth gaming state, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix A47]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A40, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where the gaming balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A47, the distribution portion of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and perform trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. Enjoy searching for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to get the pleasure of searching for an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

[Appendix A48]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A47, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed unit (381D, 389F).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A48, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A48, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix A50]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A49, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A48 to Supplementary A50, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A49 to A51, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed, the fixed portion is returned to the initial set position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set position. Will be possible. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix A52]
The distribution section (38F) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail as the top and the vertical line passing through the one nail as the axis of symmetry in the front view of the appendices A48 to A51. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A52, by adjusting the nail on the top, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix A53]
The distribution portion (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing portion (381D).
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is played toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A48 to Supplementary A52, which is rotatable in a second direction for moving a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the gaming ball to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, wherein the rotating body (382D) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix A55]
The distribution unit (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to Appendix A54, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A54 and the appendix A55, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution part, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix B1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
A first winning opening (314) into which a game ball distributed to the first passage (351) and a game ball distributed to the second passage (352) can be entered.
A second winning opening (315), which is capable of entering a game ball and has a different function from the first winning opening (314),
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352). ) Is restricted from the first position to the second position where the game ball passing through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). The accessory member (36) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and when the gaming ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not there is an operation, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are movable while the entry of the game balls into the second winning opening is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the standby position where the movable accessory member is not operating. When the accessory member is in the operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the ball-entry ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine in which both the gaming balls distributed to the first passage and the gaming balls distributed to the second passage can enter the same first winning opening, the monotony of the game is reduced and the game is movable. It is possible to realize a new game playability according to the control mode of the operation of the accessory member and improve the fun of the game.

[Appendix B2]
The appendix is characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as compared with the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in B1.

[Appendix B3]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
It is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and to detect the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is the detection means (the first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the ball, and the detection means (319) that launches the game ball into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The game state is shifted between a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318), and a plurality of game states including. Further equipped with a game state transition means (41),
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices B2 and B3, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter the second winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the second winning opening. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix B4]
In the second winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the detected gaming ball is arranged at a position longer than the time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix B4, the time required for the gaming ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning opening and the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means enter the second winning opening. The time required to make a ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left side area of the game board can enter the second winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right side area makes it difficult to enter the second winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix B5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning opening (315). ) Is allowed to be entered, and the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) is restricted from being entered into the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix B3 or the appendix B4.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix B5, it is possible to appropriately limit the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning opening when a right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix B6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) is the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices B3 to B5, which is characterized in that it is a time allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into the second winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix B7]
Movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S)
At the first position (standby position), the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314) is permitted, and the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is restricted.
It is characterized in that, in the second position (operating position), the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314) is restricted, and the allowance of the gaming ball to the second winning opening (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note B1 to Supplementary note B6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the gaming ball is allowed to enter one of the second winning opening and the third winning opening depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. In the state where the entry of the game ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and the entry of the gaming ball into one winning opening is restricted, while the entry of the gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted. One of the acceptable conditions is achieved. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into one winning opening, but also allows the gaming ball to enter the other winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B8]
The movable accessory member (36R) has a first portion (361R) for allowing a gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315), and the second winning opening. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices B1 to B7, which comprises a second portion (362R) for allowing the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315). ..

[Appendix B9]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first starting port (314).
At the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (315), and the second The gaming machine according to Appendix B8, wherein the portion (362R) allows the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B8 and B9, the movable accessory member has the first part in which the gaming ball is inserted into the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening, and the gaming machine from the right side of the second winning opening. With a simple configuration of providing a second portion for allowing the ball to enter the second winning opening, one movable accessory member can make the gaming ball win the second winning opening from a plurality of routes. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315). Further having a penetration (363R)
The game according to Appendix B8 or Appendix B9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetration portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B10, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating portion and entered into the second winning opening.

[Appendix B11]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S).
The tips of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other in the first position (standby position), and they are close to each other in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix B7, wherein the tip portions of the slingshot machines are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B11, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening and the allowance or restriction of the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening.

[Appendix B12]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is said to be in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved to the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix B11, wherein the passing gaming ball interferes with the gaming ball to move the gaming ball toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, the gaming ball is distributed into the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the gaming ball is the first movable accessory member as a movable accessory member in the second passage by the distribution device. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix B12, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the second winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B13]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), the ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position).
When the player is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B12.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix B13, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix B14]
Addendum, which is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and further includes a retracting guiding portion (393,394) for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B14, a retracting guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix B14, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched into the left region of the gaming board, the second winning opening in the movable accessory member. Since the gaming ball can be received at a position away from the ball, it is possible to secure a long time for the gaming ball to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix B15]
The evacuation guidance unit (393,394) includes the plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are arranged in an inclined shape located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix B14.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix B15, the gaming ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Further, in a gaming machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the gaming board, it is possible to provide an evacuation guidance unit when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion, and to make it difficult to receive the support by the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix B16]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning opening (315) at the second position, and the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36) is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B15, characterized by having a delay portion (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B16, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the gaming ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if the movable accessory member receives the game ball by the movable accessory member, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the player strikes right, the game ball is caused by the delay portion. Can secure a long time to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position, and thus is not encouraged. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the method is performed.

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B16, wherein the delay portion (364,364A to 364C) moves a gaming ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36,36A to 36C).

[Appendix B18]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) is one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (364D to 364G) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H). 364H) The gaming machine according to Appendix B16 or Appendix B17.

[Appendix B19]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is either a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P), wherein the delay portion (364I to 364P) is any of the appendices B16 to B18. The described gaming machine.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B19, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices B17 to B20, the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay portion having a simple structure. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix B21]
From Appendix B16, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine described in any of the appendices B20.

[Appendix B22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B21, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B21 or Appendix B22, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) exert a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force on the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices B21 to B23, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member. Because it becomes easier to pay attention to, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix B24]
Further provided with a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states.
The gaming state transition means (41) has a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning opening (315) is different. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, which includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to the appendix B24 has three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix B24, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming property based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. become.

[Appendix B25]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314), but is difficult to be entered into the second winning opening (315).
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right area to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315).
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is more likely to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched in the right side region.
The fifth game state is
The gaming ball launched into the right side region is less likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and is more likely to enter the second winning opening (315) than the gaming ball launched into the left side region. The gaming machine according to Appendix B24, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B25, the ease of entering the first winning opening and the second winning opening differs depending on the launching area of the gaming ball with respect to the gaming board in each of the third to fifth gaming states. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix B26]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) operates from the first position to the second position when it is detected by the other detection means (319) that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the ball is detected.
In the fifth gaming state, the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means (318) when the gaming ball is launched into the right side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix B25, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B26, the movable accessory member operates when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means or other detecting means, so that the gaming ball can enter the second winning opening. To. Then, each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different.

[Appendix B27]
The first winning opening (314R) is the first special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The second winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B26, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B27, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game advantageous to the player by the entry of the gaming machine into the first starting port and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening. Is different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second starting opening different from each other, it is possible to realize three gaming states in which the expected degree of shifting to the second special game is different. As a result, the playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix B28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314L), and is easily entered into the second starting opening (3145). ) Is difficult to enter
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (35) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter into the first winning opening (314), and the detection means (318). When it is detected that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy to enter the third winning opening (315).
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the gaming ball launched into the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the gaming ball passes through the specific region. The gaming machine according to the appendix B27, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix B29]
The fourth gaming state of the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state is characterized in that it is difficult for a gaming ball launched in the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix B28.

[Appendix B30]
The fifth game state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) enters the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315). Difficult to do
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to win in the first winning opening (314), and is difficult to win by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix B28 or Appendix B29, which is characterized in that it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that the gaming ball passes through the second passage (352). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B28 to B30, by adopting a distribution device together with the movable accessory member, three gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different are realized. To. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which the game ball is launched in the left area and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is played without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right area. It is possible to realize the progressing fifth gaming state. As a result, the game can be broadened, and at the same time, the game playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix B31]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first special determination and the first, as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B27 to B30, characterized in that there is a high probability that it is determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the special determination.

[Appendix B32]
A first special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit) for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) by the first special symbol. 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination is completed. Move to a special game state,
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314) is to shift to the special gaming state. After the end of the game, the state is changed to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C').
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix B31, characterized in that the transition to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is performed after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices B31 and B32, for example, a gaming property having a barrier before shifting to a special gaming state in which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuation rates. It will be possible to provide gaming machines with various game features.

[Appendix B33]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
The first determination result (probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, and
The second determination result (normal jackpot) that shifts to a game state other than the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special game state, and
The gaming machine according to the appendix B32, which comprises.

[Appendix B34]
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the fourth game It is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination to shift to the special gaming state as compared with the state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). Move to the 6th game state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed. The gaming machine according to Appendix B33.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix B33 and the appendix B34, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game and the fifth determination result after the end of the special game. Includes the second determination result that shifts to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Further, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state are more likely to be determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. Then, it has three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different, and the ball is entered into the first winning opening as an opportunity. On condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the game shifts to the fourth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is an opportunity. On condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the fifth gaming state is performed after the end of the special game. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to the probabilistic machine including the so-called loop probabilistic machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to the appendix B33 and the appendix B34, the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is gradually shifted to the fifth gaming state through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. 2 It is necessary to obtain the first judgment result as the result of the special judgment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game-playing machine that gradually shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix B35]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination. The gaming machine according to Appendix B34, characterized in that the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed after the end of the special gaming.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B35, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state after the end of the special gaming, so that the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state The rate of stay in the state is low. On the other hand, in the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second winning opening by the support by the movable accessory member, but also the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This mode has a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, by lowering the stay ratio of the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state, the gaming property is easy to fall into the 3rd gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value obtained by the player. We can also provide a well-balanced gaming machine.

[Appendix B36]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination is made. A transition number setting means for setting the upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state based on the first transition to the special gaming state, and
The gaming state transition means (41) is characterized in that it shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special gaming state of the maximum number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix B32.

Note: The gaming machine according to B36 has three gaming states, the third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different, and up to the maximum number of transitions, the first hit. The transition to the special gaming state from is continued. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the fourth gaming state after the special game is completed. , On condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the fifth gaming state after the special game is completed. .. That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball is triggered by entering the first winning opening or the second winning opening. Therefore, in the transition opportunity to the remaining special gaming states after the first hit, the playability of how to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving many transition opportunities to the special gaming states. It is possible to provide a gaming machine to have.

[Appendix B37]
In the game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth game state (mode C') or the fifth game state (mode E') is the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to the appendix B32, characterized in that the player shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) when the above-mentioned third gaming state (mode A) is reached.

[Appendix B38]
Further provided with a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry portion (824) opened in the special game.
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special in the special gaming in the special gaming state. On condition that the game ball enters the ball entry portion, after the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C').
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C') is to shift to the special gaming state, the special gaming in the special gaming state is described. The gaming machine according to the appendix B37, which is characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the completion of the special gaming, provided that the gaming ball enters the special entering portion (824). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendix B37 and the appendix B38, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game is shifted to the first gaming state. To. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to the ST machine including the so-called V-ST machine. Further, in the gaming machines according to the appendix B37 and the appendix B38, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state in order to shift to the fifth gaming state which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and then in the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. It is necessary that the result of the special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, how quickly the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state in the second special symbol game is obtained, and the transition to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is obtained. Judgment of how many special gaming states are to be transferred before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the fifth gaming state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game-like property of obtaining a result.

[Appendix B39]
A first special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit) for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) by the first special symbol. 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special gaming state. It is possible to enter the game ball by being activated, and the right to shift to the special game state (type 2 jackpot) by the game state transition means (41) is granted by the entry of the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the one that shifts to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), the transition to the special gaming state is performed.
The fourth gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special gaming in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. To
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to shift to the special gaming state (type 2 jackpot) given by the game ball entering the special ball entry unit (833). Move to the special game state and
It is characterized in that the transition to the fifth gaming state (mode E) is performed after the completion of the special game in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the gaming ball enters the special entry portion (833). The gaming machine according to the appendix B28.

[Appendix B40]
The gaming state transition means (41) is described when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix B39, which is characterized by shifting to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix B39 and the appendix B40, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), or the gaming ball enters the special entry portion. By doing so, the right to shift to the special gaming state is granted (2 types of big hits), and the game shifts to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can also be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix B41]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. With this as an opportunity, a normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not the movable accessory member (36) is operated between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). ) Further
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are based on the normal determination means (41) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B26 to B40, characterized in that the probability that the movable accessory member (36) is determined to be activated in the normal determination is high.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B41, the probability of determining that the movable accessory member is activated in the ordinary determination by the ordinary determination means differs between the fourth gaming state, the fifth gaming state, and the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix B42]
In the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to the appendix B24 to the appendix B41, wherein the time from the detection to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B42, in the fourth gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage as compared with the third gaming state. The time to get there is short. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix B43]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is the movable accessory member (36) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices B24 to B42, which is characterized by a long operating time.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B43, in the fifth gaming state, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix B44]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B43, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where the gaming balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B44, the distribution portion of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and perform trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. Enjoy searching for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to get the pleasure of searching for an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

[Appendix B45]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B44, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) has a fixed portion (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B45, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix B46]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B45, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix B47]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B46, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix B48]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B45 to B47, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B46 to B48, at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed. It will be possible to return. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix B49]
The distribution section (38F) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail as the top and the vertical line passing through the one nail as the axis of symmetry in the front view of the appendices B45 to B48. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B49, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion by adjusting the nail at the top.

[Appendix B50]
The distribution portion (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing portion (381D).
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is played toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B45 to B49, which is rotatable in a second direction for moving a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B50, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the gaming ball to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix B51]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B50, wherein the rotating body (382D) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix B52]
The distribution unit (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to Appendix B51, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B51 and the appendix B52, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution part, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix C1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
The first winning opening (314) into which the game balls distributed in the first passage (351) can enter, and
A second winning opening (315), which is capable of entering a game ball distributed to the second passage (352) and has a different function from the first winning opening (314),
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352). ) Is restricted from the first position to the second position where the game ball passing through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). Accessory members (36T-36X) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and when the gaming ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not there is an operation, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are movable while the entry of the game balls into the second winning opening is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the standby position where the movable accessory member is not operating. When the accessory member is in the operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the ball-entry ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine in which a gaming ball distributed to the first passage and a gaming ball distributed to the second passage can enter a winning opening having different functions, the monotony of the game is reduced and the movable accessory member. It is possible to realize a new game playability according to the control mode of the operation of the game and improve the fun of the game.

[Appendix C2]
The movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is characterized in that the operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the appendix C1.

[Appendix C3]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
It is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and to detect the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is the detection means (the first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the ball, and the detection means (319) that launches the game ball into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The game state is shifted between a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318), and a plurality of game states including. Further equipped with a game state transition means (41),
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C2 and C3, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter the second winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the second winning opening. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix C4]
In the second winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix C3, wherein the detected gaming ball is arranged at a position longer than the time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C4, the time required for the gaming ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning opening and the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means enter the second winning opening. The time required to make a ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left side area of the game board can enter the second winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right side area makes it difficult to enter the second winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix C5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning opening (315). ) Is allowed to be entered, and the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) is restricted from being entered into the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix C3 or the appendix C4.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening when the right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which the left-handed hit is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix C6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the gaming ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices C3 to C5, which is characterized in that it is a time allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C6, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into the second winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix C7]
A gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the second winning opening (315) and the game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) toward the second winning opening (315). Induction part (31M') to move and
Further prepare
The movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is
In the first position (standby position), the second winning opening (315) was closed and launched into the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the right region of the game board (31). Restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening (315),
At the second position (operating position), the second winning opening (315) is opened, and a passage for a gaming ball is formed between the guiding portion (31M') and the second winning opening (315). The appendix C1 is characterized in that the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the gaming ball launched into the right side region are allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in C6.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C7, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the passage of the gaming ball is formed between the guide portion and the second winning opening, so that the second passage of the sorting device is formed. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball launched in the right area of the game board can be entered into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix C8]
The movable accessory member (36T) can be slidably moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position).
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, the movable accessory member is slid at the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guide portion and the second winning opening is closed. One movable accessory member makes it possible to insert a game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths.

[Appendix C9]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36V) can operate between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation.
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix C10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the gaming board (31).

[Appendix C11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C9 to C11, the movable accessory member is vertically aligned at the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guide portion and the second winning opening is closed. With a simple configuration of rotating around a plumb bob, it is possible to insert a game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix C12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second starting port (315) and the third position (standby position) for opening the gap.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C12, the gaming ball in the right region of the sorting device is movable in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short time without providing the evacuation guidance unit. It is possible to prevent the accessory member from being guided to the second starting port.

[Appendix C13]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable and opens the second starting port (315) and the closing portion (364W) capable of closing the gap, and the second starting port (315) and the gap. It has a possible penetration (363W) and
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed by the closed portion (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W).
The second position (operating position) is characterized in that the second winning opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing portion (364W). The gaming machine described in Appendix C7.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C13, a movable accessory member having a closed portion and a penetrating portion is rotated, so that the game ball is entered into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Will be possible.

[Appendix C14]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. It is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
Penetrates along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis (36X) and penetrates in a direction intersecting the first penetration portion (361X) through which the game ball can pass and the first penetration portion (361X) in the direction of the rotation axis. It also has a second penetration (362X) through which the game ball can pass.
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetrating portion (362X).
The gaming machine according to Appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetrating portion (361X) communicates with the second winning opening (315).

Note: In the gaming machine according to C14, a gaming ball is inserted into the third winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member due to a simple configuration in which a rotating body is rotated between the third winning opening and the guiding portion. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix C15]
A gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the third winning opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices C7 to C14, further comprising a guard portion (31B) for preventing the pachinko machine from exceeding the third winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, by providing a guard portion, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward the second winning opening is surely second prized. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix C16]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), the ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position).
When the player is in the second position, either the game ball passing through the second passage (352) or the game ball passing through the specific area is allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C15.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C16, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix C17]
Addendum, which is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and further includes a retracting guiding portion (393,394) for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C16.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C17, a retracting guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix C17, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched into the left region of the gaming board, the second winning opening in the movable accessory member. Since the gaming ball can be received at a position away from the ball, it is possible to secure a long time for the gaming ball to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix C18]
The evacuation guidance unit (393,394) includes the plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are arranged in an inclined shape located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix C17.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix C18, the gaming ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Further, in a gaming machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven on a gaming board, it is possible to provide an evacuation guidance unit when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion, and to make it difficult to receive the support by the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix C19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning opening (315) at the second position, and the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36) is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C18, which has a delay portion (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C19, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the gaming ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if the movable accessory member receives the game ball by the movable accessory member, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the player strikes right, the game ball is caused by the delay portion. Can secure a long time to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position, and thus is not encouraged. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the method is performed.

[Appendix C20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C19, wherein the delay portion (364,364A to 364C) moves the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36,36A to 36C) by a meandering path.

[Appendix C21]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) is one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (364D to 364G) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H). 364H) The gaming machine according to Appendix C19 or Appendix C20.

[Appendix C22]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is either a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) from the appendix C19 to the appendix C21. The described gaming machine.

[Appendix C23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C22, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C20 to C23, the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay portion having a simple structure. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix C24]
From Appendix C19, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine described in any of the appendices C23.

[Appendix C25]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix C26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C24 or Appendix C25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) exert a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force on the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C24 to C26, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member is improved. Because it becomes easier to pay attention to, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix C27]
Further provided with a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states.
The gaming state transition means (41) has a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning opening (315) is different. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, which includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

Note: The gaming machine according to C27 has three gaming states, that is, a third to fifth gaming state in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix C27, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming property based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. become.

[Appendix C28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314), but is difficult to be entered into the second winning opening (315).
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right area to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315).
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is more likely to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched in the right side region.
The fifth game state is
The gaming ball launched into the right side region is less likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and is more likely to enter the second winning opening (315) than the gaming ball launched into the left side region. The gaming machine according to Appendix C27, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C28, the ease of entering the first winning opening and the second winning opening differs depending on the launching area of the gaming ball with respect to the gaming board in each of the third to fifth gaming states. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix C29]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) operates from the first position to the second position when it is detected by the other detection means (319) that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the ball is detected.
In the fifth gaming state, the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means (318) when the gaming ball is launched into the right side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix C28, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C29, the movable accessory member operates when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means or other detecting means, so that the gaming ball can enter the second winning opening. To. Then, each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different.

[Appendix C30]
The first winning opening (314R) is the first special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The second winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C29, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result of shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.

Note: In the gaming machine according to C30, the degree of expectation (function) of shifting to the second special game that is advantageous to the player by the entry of the gaming machine into the first starting port and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening. Is different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second starting opening different from each other, it is possible to realize three gaming states in which the expected degree of shifting to the second special game is different. As a result, the playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix C31]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314L), and is easily entered into the second starting opening (3145). ) Is difficult to enter
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (35) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter into the first winning opening (314), and the detection means (318). When it is detected that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy to enter the third winning opening (315).
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the gaming ball launched into the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the gaming ball passes through the specific region. The gaming machine according to the appendix C30, wherein the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix C32]
The fourth gaming state of the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state is characterized in that it is difficult for a gaming ball launched in the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix C31.

[Appendix C33]
The fifth game state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) enters the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315). Difficult to do
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to win in the first winning opening (314), and is difficult to win by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix C31 or Appendix C32, which is characterized in that it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that the gaming ball passes through the second passage (352). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C31 to C33, by adopting a distribution device together with the movable accessory member, three gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different are realized. To. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which the game ball is launched in the left area and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is played without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right area. It is possible to realize the progressing fifth gaming state. As a result, the game can be broadened, and at the same time, the game playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix C34]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first special determination and the first, as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices C30 to C33, which is characterized in that the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is high in the special determination.

[Appendix C35]
A first special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit) for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) by the first special symbol. 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination is completed. Move to a special game state,
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314) is to shift to the special gaming state. After the end of the game, the state is changed to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C').
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix C34, which is characterized by shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices C34 and C35, for example, a gaming property having a barrier before shifting to a special gaming state in which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuation rates. It will be possible to provide gaming machines with various game features.

[Appendix C36]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
The first determination result (probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, and
The second determination result (normal jackpot) that shifts to a game state other than the fifth game state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special game state, and
The gaming machine according to the appendix C35, which comprises.

[Appendix C37]
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the fourth game It is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination to shift to the special gaming state as compared with the state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E'). Move to the 6th game state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed. The gaming machine according to the appendix C36.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C36 and C37, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game and the fifth determination result after the end of the special game. Includes the second determination result that shifts to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Further, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state are more likely to be determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. Then, it has three game states of the third to fifth game states in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different, and the ball is entered into the first winning opening as an opportunity. On condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the game shifts to the fourth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is an opportunity. On condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the fifth gaming state is performed after the end of the special game. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to the probabilistic machine including the so-called loop probabilistic machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to the appendix C36 and the appendix C37, the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is gradually shifted to the fifth gaming state through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. 2 It is necessary to obtain the first judgment result as the result of the special judgment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game-playing machine that gradually shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix C38]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination. The gaming machine according to Appendix C37, which is characterized by shifting to the first gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special gaming.

Note: In the gaming machine according to C38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state after the end of the special gaming, so that the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state The rate of stay in the state is low. On the other hand, in the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second winning opening by the support by the movable accessory member, but also the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This mode has a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, by lowering the stay ratio of the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state, the gaming property is easy to fall into the 3rd gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value obtained by the player. We can also provide a well-balanced gaming machine.

[Appendix C39]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination is made. A transition number setting means for setting the upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state based on the first transition to the special gaming state, and
The gaming state transition means (41) is characterized in that it shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special gaming state of the maximum number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to the appendix C35.

Note: The gaming machine according to C39 has three gaming states, the third to fifth gaming states, in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different, and up to the maximum number of transitions, the first hit. The transition to the special gaming state from is continued. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the fourth gaming state after the special game is completed. , On condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the fifth gaming state after the special game is completed. .. That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball is triggered by entering the first winning opening or the second winning opening. Therefore, in the transition opportunity to the remaining special gaming states after the first hit, the playability of how to shift to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving many transition opportunities to the special gaming states. It is possible to provide a gaming machine to have.

[Appendix C40]
In the game state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth game state (mode C') or the fifth game state (mode E') is the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to the appendix C35, which is characterized by shifting to the third gaming state (mode A) when the above-mentioned third gaming state (mode A) is reached.

[Appendix C41]
Further provided with a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry portion (824) opened in the special game.
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special in the special gaming in the special gaming state. On condition that the game ball enters the ball entry portion, after the end of the special game, the state is changed to the fourth game state (mode C').
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C') is to shift to the special gaming state, the special gaming in the special gaming state is described. The gaming machine according to Appendix C40, which is characterized by shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E') after the end of the special gaming, provided that the gaming ball enters the special entering portion (824). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendix C40 and the appendix C41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game is shifted to the first gaming state. To. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to the ST machine including the so-called V-ST machine. Further, in the gaming machines according to the appendices C40 and C41, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state in order to shift to the fifth gaming state which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, first shift to the fourth gaming state, and then in the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. It is necessary that the result of the special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, how quickly the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state in the second special symbol game is obtained, and the transition to the fifth gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is obtained. Judgment of how many special gaming states are to be transferred before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit number after shifting to the fifth gaming state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game-like property of obtaining a result.

[Appendix C42]
A first special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit) for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) by the first special symbol. 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special gaming state. It is possible to enter the game ball by being activated, and the right to shift to the special game state (type 2 jackpot) by the game state transition means (41) is granted by the entry of the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the one that shifts to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), the transition to the special gaming state is performed.
The fourth gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special gaming in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. To
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to shift to the special gaming state (type 2 jackpot) given by the game ball entering the special ball entry unit (833). Move to the special game state and
It is characterized in that the transition to the fifth gaming state (mode E) is performed after the completion of the special game in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the gaming ball enters the special entry portion (833). The gaming machine according to the appendix C31.

[Appendix C43]
The gaming state transition means (41) is described when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix C42, which is characterized by shifting to a third gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix C42 and the appendix C43, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), or the gaming ball enters the special entry portion. By doing so, the right to shift to the special gaming state is granted (2 types of big hits), and the game shifts to the special gaming state. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can also be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix C44]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. With this as an opportunity, a normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not the movable accessory member (36) is operated between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position). ) Further
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are based on the normal determination means (41) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C27 to C43, wherein it is highly likely that the movable accessory member (36) is determined to be activated in the normal determination.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C44, the probability that the movable accessory member is determined to be operated in the ordinary determination by the ordinary determination means differs between the fourth gaming state, the fifth gaming state, and the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix C45]
In the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to the appendix C27 to C44, wherein the time from the detection to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C45, in the fourth gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, as compared with the third gaming state. The time to get there is short. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix C46]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is the movable accessory member (36) as compared with the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices C27 to C45, which is characterized by a long operating time.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C46, in the fifth gaming state, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix C47]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C46, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where the gaming balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C47, the distribution portion of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and perform trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. Enjoy searching for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to get the pleasure of searching for an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

[Appendix C48]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C47, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) has an immovable and non-rotatable fixed unit (381D, 389F).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C48, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix C49]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C48, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix C50]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C49, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix C51]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C48 to C50, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C49 to C51, at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed. It will be possible to return. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix C52]
The distribution section (38F) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail as the top and the vertical line passing through the one nail as the axis of symmetry in the front view of the appendices C48 to C51. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C52, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion by adjusting the nail at the top.

[Appendix C53]
The distribution portion (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing portion (381D).
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is played toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C48 to C52, which is rotatable in a second direction for moving a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the gaming ball to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix C54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C53, wherein the rotating body (382D) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix C55]
The distribution unit (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to Appendix C54, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C54 and the appendix C55, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution part, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix D1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
The first winning opening (314) into which the game balls distributed in the first passage (351) can enter, and
A second winning opening (313'), which is capable of entering a game ball distributed to the second passage (352) and has a function different from that of the first winning opening (314).
A game ball distributed to the second passage (352) can be entered, and a third winning opening (315) having a function different from that of the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313'). When,
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning opening (313) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352). ') And the second passage (352) from the first position where entry into one of the third winning openings (315) is restricted and entry into the other winning opening is permitted. ) Is allowed to enter the one winning opening (313') of the game ball, and the movable accessory that operates in the second position is restricted from entering the other winning opening (315). Member (36) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and when the gaming ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not there is an operation, the entry of the game ball into the third winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are restricted from entering the third winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the game ball is allowed to enter the third winning opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the ball entry ratio to the third winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the gaming balls distributed by the distribution device can enter any of the three winning openings having different functions, the monotony of the game is reduced and the operation of the movable accessory member is controlled according to the control mode. It is possible to realize new playability and improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix D2]
The appendix is characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as compared with the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in D1.

[Appendix D3]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
It is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and to detect the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is the detection means (the first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the ball, and the detection means (319) that launches the game ball into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The game state is shifted between a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318), and a plurality of game states including. Further equipped with a game state transition means (41),
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D2 and D3, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the third winning opening by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter the third winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the third winning opening. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix D4]
In the third winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the third winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the detected gaming ball is arranged at a position longer than the time required for entering the third winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix D4, the time required for the gaming ball detected by the detecting means to enter the third winning opening and the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means enter the third winning opening. The time required to make a ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter the third winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right area makes it difficult to enter the third winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix D5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the third winning opening (315). ) Is allowed to be entered, and the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is restricted from being entered into the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix D3 or the appendix D4.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix D5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the entry of the gaming ball into the third winning opening when the right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which the left-handed hit is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix D6]
In the second gaming state (mode E), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is such that the gaming ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D3 to D5, wherein the time is allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix D6, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into the third winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix D8]
The movable accessory member (36) is
An opening / closing unit that puts the second winning opening (313') in the open state at the first position (standby position) and closes the second winning opening (313') at the second position (operating position). (362) and
Continuing from the opening / closing portion (362), the movement of the game ball to the right of the second winning opening (313') toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the first position (standby position) is restricted. A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the second winning opening (313') toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the second position (operating position).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D7.

[Appendix D9]
The opening / closing portion (362) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the second winning opening (313'), and the third winning opening (315) is allowed to enter. Restrict entry,
At the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the second winning opening (313'), and enters the third winning opening (315). Allows entry,
The guide portion is
In the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right side region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362) is restricted.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D8, which allows the gaming ball launched into the right side region of the gaming board (31) to move toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the second position (operating position). ..

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D8 and D9, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing portion that can open and close the second winning opening and a guide portion that moves the game ball to the right of the second winning opening toward the opening / closing portion. With a simple configuration of providing, a game ball can be won in the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D10]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), the ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position).
When the player is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D9.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix D10, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the distribution device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters the third winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the third winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix D11]
Addendum, which is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and further includes a retracting guiding portion (393,394) for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D10.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D11, an evacuation guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball in a direction away from the third winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix D11, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched into the left region of the gaming board, the third winning opening in the movable accessory member. Since the gaming ball can be received at a position away from the player, it is possible to secure a long time for the gaming ball to reach the third winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix D12]
The evacuation guidance unit (393,394) includes the plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that the nails on the side far from the third winning opening (315) are arranged in an inclined shape located lower than the nails on the side closer to the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix D11.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix D12, the gaming ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Further, in a gaming machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven on a gaming board, it is possible to provide an evacuation guidance unit when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion, and to make it difficult to receive the support by the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix D13]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the third winning opening (315) at the second position, and the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36) is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D12, characterized by having a delay portion (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D13, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the gaming ball to the third winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if the movable accessory member receives the game ball by the movable accessory member, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the player strikes right, the game ball is caused by the delay portion. Can secure a long time to reach the third winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position, and thus is not encouraged. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the method is performed.

[Appendix D14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D13, wherein the delay portion (364,364A to 364C) moves a gaming ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36,36A to 36C).

[Appendix D15]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) is one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (364D to 364G) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H). 364H) The gaming machine according to Appendix D13 or Appendix D14.

[Appendix D16]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is either a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) from the appendix D13 to the appendix D15. The described gaming machine.

[Appendix D17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D16, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D14 to D17, the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay portion having a simple structure. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix D18]
From Appendix D13, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D17.

[Appendix D19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D18, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix D20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D18 or Appendix D19, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) exert a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force on the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D18 to D20, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member is improved. Because it becomes easier to pay attention to, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix D21]
Further provided with a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states.
The gaming state transition means (41) has a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and the third gaming state (mode C, mode C'), in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the third winning opening (315) is different. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, which includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

The gaming machine according to the appendix D21 has three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the third winning opening is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix D21, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming property based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the third winning opening is different. become.

[Appendix D22]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313'), and is difficult to be entered into the third winning opening (315).
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right area to enter any of the first winning opening (314), the second winning opening (313'), and the third winning opening (315).
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left area has the first winning opening (314), the second winning opening (313'), and the third winning opening (315) as compared with the game ball launched in the right area. It is easy to enter any of them,
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the gaming ball launched in the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313'), and the third prize ball is compared with the gaming ball launched in the left side region. The gaming machine according to Appendix D21, which is characterized in that it is easy to enter a winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D22, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease of entering the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening depends on the launching area of the gaming ball with respect to the gaming board. different. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening, the second winning opening, and the third winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix D23]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) operates from the first position to the second position when it is detected by the other detection means (319) that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the ball is detected.
In the fifth gaming state, the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means (318) when the gaming ball is launched into the right side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to the appendix D22, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D23, the movable accessory member operates when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means or other detecting means, so that the gaming ball can enter the third winning opening. To. Then, each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the third winning opening is different.

[Appendix D24]
The first winning opening (314L) and the second starting opening (314R) shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to make the first special judgment (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to let it
The third winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D23, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D24, the degree of expectation (function) to be transferred to the second special game advantageous to the player by the entry of the gaming machine into the first starting port and the entry of the gaming ball into the third starting opening. Is different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first winning opening and the third starting opening different from each other, it is possible to realize three game states having different expectations of being transferred to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D25]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D24, wherein the second starting port (313') is a general winning port.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D25, since the second starting opening is a general winning opening, the frequency with which special determinations (first special determination and second special determination) can be received in the third to fifth gaming states is high. different. As a result, the special judgment can be received at a frequency according to the game state, so that the game becomes more diverse, the game playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D26]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and is easily entered into the second starting opening (313). ') And it is difficult to enter the third winning opening (315),
A game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enters the first winning opening (314) and the third winning opening (315). It is difficult to get a ball, and it is easy to get into the second winning opening (313').
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 313') and the third winning opening (315).
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enters the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313'). It is difficult to be balled, and when it is detected by the detection means (318) that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy to enter the third winning opening (315).
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the gaming ball launched into the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313'), and the gaming ball moves into the specific region by the other detection means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix D25, wherein the ball is easily entered into the third winning opening (315) when it is detected that the ball has passed.

[Appendix D27]
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, the gaming ball launched in the right area is the first winning opening (314), the second winning opening (313'), and the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix D26, which is characterized in that it is difficult for the ball to enter any of the above.

[Appendix D28]
The fifth game state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 313') and the third winning opening (315).
A game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) wins a prize in the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313'). It is difficult for the pachinko ball to pass through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), and the ball is easily entered into the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix D26 or Appendix D27.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices D26 to D28, by adopting a distribution device together with the movable accessory member, three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio with the third winning opening is different are realized. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which the game ball is launched in the left area and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is played without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right area. It is possible to realize the progressing fifth gaming state. As a result, the game can be broadened, and at the same time, the game playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D29]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first special determination and the first, as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D24 to D28, which is characterized in that the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is high in the special determination.

[Appendix D30]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) and the second starting opening (313') is displayed by the first special symbol. The first special symbol display unit (371) that executes
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the third winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination is completed. Move to a special game state,
The condition is that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313') is to shift to the special gaming state. After the end of the special game in the special game state, the state shifts to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C').
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the third winning opening (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix D29, which is characterized by shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices D29 and D30, for example, a gaming property having a barrier before shifting to a special gaming state in which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuation rates. It will be possible to provide gaming machines with various game features.

[Appendix D31]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D30, wherein the distribution portion (38) is fixed at a position where the gaming balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D31, the distribution portion of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and perform trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. Enjoy searching for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to get the pleasure of searching for an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

[Appendix D32]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D31, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) has a fixed portion (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D32, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix D33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D32, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix D34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D33, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix D35]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D32 to D34, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices D33 to D35, at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed. It will be possible to return. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix D36]
The distribution section (38F) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail as the top and the vertical line passing through the one nail as the axis of symmetry in the front view of the appendices D32 to D35. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D36, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion by adjusting the nail at the top.

[Appendix D37]
The distribution portion (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing portion (381D).
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is played toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D32 to D36, which is rotatable in a second direction for moving a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D37, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the gaming ball to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix D38]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D37, wherein the rotating body (382D) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix D39]
The distribution unit (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to Appendix D38, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D38 and the appendix D39, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution unit, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix E1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
A plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) having a function different from that of the first winning opening (314).
Discharge ports (317) for discharging game balls that did not enter the plurality of winning ports, and
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (36) that can move from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) where the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening (314).
Equipped with
A game ball distributed to the first passage (351) can enter the first winning opening (314).
The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352)
When the movable accessory member (36) is in the first position (standby position), entry into the second winning opening (315) is restricted, and the ball is ejected from the ejection port (3117).
A gaming machine characterized in that when the movable accessory member (36) is in the second position (operating position), the ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, when the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on whether or not there is an operation, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are restricted from entering the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where it operates, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this way, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the ball entry ratio to the second winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the gaming balls distributed to the second passage can be discharged to the discharge port, the monotony of the game is reduced, and new playability is realized according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix E2]
The appendix is characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as compared with the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in E1.

[Appendix E3]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
It is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball, and to detect the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is the detection means (the first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the ball, and the detection means (319) that launches the game ball into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). The game state is shifted between a second game state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318), and a plurality of game states including. Further equipped with a game state transition means (41),
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices E2 and E3, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the third winning opening by the movable accessory member in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter the third winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the third winning opening. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix E4]
In the second winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix E3, wherein the detected gaming ball is arranged at a position longer than the time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix E4, the time required for the gaming ball detected by the detecting means to enter the second winning opening and the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means enter the second winning opening. The time required to make a ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left side area of the game board can enter the second winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right side area makes it difficult to enter the second winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix E5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning opening (315). ), And the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is restricted from entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix E3 or Appendix E4.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix E5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening when the right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which the left-handed hit is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix E6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) is the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E3 to E5, which is characterized in that it is a time allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into the second winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix E7]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) is
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), the ball is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position).
When the player is in the second position, either the game ball passing through the second passage (352) or the game ball passing through the specific area is allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E6.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix E7, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters the third winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the third winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix E8]
Addendum, which is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and further includes a retracting guiding portion (393,394) for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E7.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E8, a retracting guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix E8, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched into the left region of the gaming board, the second winning opening in the movable accessory member. Since the gaming ball can be received at a position away from the ball, it is possible to secure a long time for the gaming ball to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix E9]
The evacuation guidance unit (393,394) includes the plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that the nails on the side far from the second winning opening (315) are arranged in an inclined shape located lower than the nails on the side closer to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in Appendix E8.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix E9, the gaming ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Further, in a gaming machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven on a gaming board, it is possible to provide an evacuation guidance unit when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion, and to make it difficult to receive the support by the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix E10]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second winning opening (315) at the second position, and the movement of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36) is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E9, characterized by having a delay portion (364) for delaying.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E10, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the gaming ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if the movable accessory member receives the game ball by the movable accessory member, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the player strikes right, the game ball is caused by the delay portion. Can secure a long time to reach the second winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position, and thus is not encouraged. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the method is performed.

[Appendix E11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the delay portion (364,364A to 364C) moves a gaming ball in a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36,36A to 36C).

[Appendix E12]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) is one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (364D to 364G) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H). 364H) The gaming machine according to Appendix E10 or Appendix E11.

[Appendix E13]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is either a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) from the appendix E10 to the appendix E12. The described gaming machine.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E13, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices E11 to E14, the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay portion having a simple structure. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix E15]
From the appendix E10, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E14.

[Appendix E16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E15, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix E17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E15 or Appendix E16, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) exert a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force on the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices E15 to E17, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member is improved. Because it becomes easier to pay attention to, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix E18]
Further provided with a game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states.
The gaming state transition means (41) has a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and a fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') in which the expected value of the ball entry ratio to the second winning opening (315) is different. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, which includes a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E').

Note: The gaming machine according to E18 has three gaming states, that is, a third to fifth gaming state in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix E18, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming property based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different. become.

[Appendix E19]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is likely to enter the first winning opening (314) and is difficult to enter the second winning opening (315).
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right area to enter either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315).
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is more likely to be entered into either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched in the right side region.
The fifth game state is
The gaming ball launched into the right side region is less likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and is more likely to enter the second winning opening (315) than the gaming ball launched into the left side region. The gaming machine according to Appendix E18, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E19, the ease of entering the first winning opening and the second winning opening differs depending on the launching area of the gaming ball with respect to the gaming board in each of the third to fifth gaming states. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix E20]
Further provided with another detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31).
The movable accessory member (36) operates from the first position to the second position when it is detected by the other detection means (319) that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is better to launch the game ball into the left side region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball by the other detection means (319). It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the ball is detected.
In the fifth gaming state, the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means (318) when the gaming ball is launched into the right side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the other detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix E19, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E20, the movable accessory member operates when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detecting means or other detecting means, so that the gaming ball can enter the second winning opening. To. Then, each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio to the second winning opening is different.

[Appendix E21]
The first winning opening (314) is the first special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The second winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E20, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, the degree of expectation (function) to be transferred to the second special game that is advantageous to the player by the entry of the gaming machine into the first starting port and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening. Is different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second starting opening different from each other, it is possible to realize three gaming states in which the expected degree of shifting to the second special game is different. As a result, the playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved. Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix E21, since the gaming balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning openings are discharged from the ejection ports, the special determination (first special determination and the first special determination and) are performed in the third to fifth gaming states. The frequency with which you can receive the second special judgment) is different. As a result, the special judgment can be received at a frequency according to the game state, so that the game becomes more diverse, the game playability is enhanced, and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E22]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (the second winning opening (315) is difficult to enter. It is easy to enter the ball in 315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter into the first winning opening (314), and the detection means (318). When it is detected that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315).
The fifth game state is
It is difficult for the gaming ball launched into the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314), and the other detection means (319) detects that the gaming ball passes through the specific region. The gaming machine according to the appendix E21, which is characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix E23]
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, it is difficult for the gaming ball launched in the right side region to enter either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix E22, characterized in that.

[Appendix E24]
The fifth game state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is easily entered into the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening (315) is easily entered. It is difficult to enter the ball in 315),
The gaming ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to win in the first winning opening (314), and is difficult to win by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to Appendix E22 or Appendix E23, which is characterized in that it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that the gaming ball passes through the second passage (352). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendices E22 to E24, by adopting a distribution device together with the movable accessory member, three gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different are realized. To. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which the game ball is launched in the left area and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is played without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right area. It is possible to realize the progressing fifth gaming state. As a result, the game can be broadened, and at the same time, the game playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E25]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first special determination and the first, as compared with the third gaming state (mode A). 2. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E20 to E24, which is characterized in that the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is high in the special determination.

[Appendix E26]
A first special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit) for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) by the first special symbol. 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the third winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination is completed. Move to a special game state,
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314) is to shift to the special gaming state. After the end of the game, the state is changed to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C').
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix E25, characterized in that the transition to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E') is performed after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices E25 and E26, for example, a gaming property having a barrier before shifting to a special gaming state in which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuation rates. It will be possible to provide gaming machines with various game features.

[Appendix E27]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E26, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where the gaming balls introduced from the introduction port (350) interfere with each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E27, the distribution portion of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and perform trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. Enjoy searching for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to get the pleasure of searching for an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

[Appendix E28]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E27, wherein the distribution portion (38D, 38F) has a fixed portion (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E28, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix E29]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E28, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix E30]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E29, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix E31]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E28 to E30, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices E29 to E31, at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed. It will be possible to return. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix E32]
The distribution section (38F) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail as the top and the vertical line passing through the one nail as the axis of symmetry in the front view. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E32, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion by adjusting the nail at the top.

[Appendix E33]
The distribution portion (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing portion (381D).
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game ball is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E28 to E32, which is rotatable in a second direction for moving the machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E33, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the gaming ball to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix E34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E33, wherein the rotating body (382D) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix E35]
The distribution unit (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to Appendix E34, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E34 and the appendix E35, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution part, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix F1]
The first winning opening (314) where you can enter a game ball,
A second winning opening (315), which is capable of entering a game ball and has a different function from the first winning opening (314),
A game state transition means (41) that shifts a game state by establishing a predetermined state among a plurality of game states, and
Equipped with
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a first gaming state (mode A), a second gaming state (mode C, mode C'), and a third gaming state (mode E, mode E').
The first gaming state (mode A), the second gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first winning opening (314) and the said. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the winning ratio is different from that of the second winning opening (315).

Note: The gaming machine according to F1 has three gaming states, that is, first to third gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix F1, a new gaming property with improved game performance is provided based on three gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different. It will be possible to create.

[Appendix F2]
The first gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314), but is difficult to be entered into the second winning opening (315).
It is difficult for the game ball launched in the right area to enter either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315).
The second gaming state is
The game ball launched in the left side region is more likely to enter the first winning opening (351) and the second winning opening (315) than the game ball launched in the right side region.
The third gaming state is
While it is difficult for a pachinko ball launched in the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314), it enters the second winning opening (315) as compared with a gaming ball launched in the left side region. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, which is characterized by being easily used.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F2, the ease of entering the first winning opening and the second winning opening differs depending on the launching area of the gaming ball with respect to the gaming board in each of the first to third gaming states. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the first to third gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix F3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and is launched into the left side region of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). A distribution device (35) that distributes the game ball to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the distribution unit (38).
The first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
A second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31), and
The first detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the second detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. When it is detected, the game ball enters the second winning opening (315) from the first position (standby position) where the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (36) that can move to the second position (operating position) where the ball is allowed, and
Further prepare
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, it is better to launch the gaming ball into the left side region by the second detecting means (319) so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first detecting means (318). It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched into the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected.
In the third gaming state, the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first detecting means (318) when the gaming ball is launched into the right side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the second detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, the movable accessory member operates when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first detecting means or the second detecting means, so that the gaming ball enters the second winning opening. Enables. Then, each of the first to third gaming states has a launch area advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, by a simple method using a movable accessory member, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the first to third gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different.

[Appendix F4]
The first winning opening (314) is the first special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The second winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. Give an opportunity to do (big hit lottery),
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F3, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.

Note: In the gaming machine related to F4, the degree of expectation (function) to be transferred to the second special game that is advantageous to the player by the entry of the gaming machine into the first starting port and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening. Is different. Therefore, by making the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening different from each other, it is possible to realize three game states having different expectations for being transferred to the second special game. As a result, the playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix F5]
The first gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314), while the second winning opening. It is difficult to enter (315),
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is placed in either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315). Is difficult to enter,
The second gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (351), while the second winning opening. It is difficult to enter (352),
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter into the first winning opening (351), while the first detection. When it is detected by the means (318) that the game ball passes through the second passage (352), it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315).
The third gaming state is
While it is difficult for the gaming ball launched into the right side region to enter the first winning opening (314), it is detected by the second detecting means (319) that the gaming ball passes through the right side specific region. The gaming machine according to Appendix F4, characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix F6]
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, it is difficult for the gaming ball launched in the right side region to enter either the first winning opening (314) or the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix F5, which is characterized by the above.

[Appendix F7]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) is likely to be entered into the first winning opening (314), while the second winning opening. It is difficult to enter (315),
The gaming ball launched into the left side region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to win in the first winning opening (314), while the first detecting means. In the appendix F5 or the appendix F6, which is characterized in that the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening (352) when the game ball is detected to pass through the second passage (352) by (318). The described gaming machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices F5 to F7, by adopting a distribution device together with the movable accessory member, three gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different are realized. To. Therefore, the first game state and the second game state in which the game ball is launched in the left area and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is played without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right area. It is possible to realize the progressing third gaming state. As a result, the game can be broadened, and at the same time, the game playability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix F8]
The second gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') are the first special determination and the first, as compared with the first gaming state (mode A). 2 The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F4 to F7, characterized in that the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is high in the special determination.

[Appendix F9]
A first special symbol display unit (1st special symbol display unit) for executing a first special symbol game that displays the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening (314) by the first special symbol. 371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination is completed. Move to a special game state,
In the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L, 314R) is to shift to the special gaming state. After the end of the special game, the player shifts to the second game state (mode C, mode C').
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix F8, characterized in that the transition to the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') is performed after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendix F8 and the appendix F9, for example, a gaming property having a barrier before shifting to a special gaming state in which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuation rates. It will be possible to provide gaming machines with various game features.

[Appendix F10]
As a result of the first special determination or the second special determination,
The first determination result (probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, and
The second determination result (normal jackpot) that shifts to a game state other than the third game state (mode E, mode E') after the end of the special game in the special game state, and
The gaming machine according to the appendix F9, which comprises.

[Appendix F11]
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination, the second game Compared to the state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E'), it is determined in the first special determination or the second special determination to shift to the special gaming state. Move to the 4th gaming state (mode B, mode D) with low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state (mode B, mode D), the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed. The gaming machine according to the appendix F10, characterized by the above.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix F10 and the appendix F11, as a result of the first special determination or the second special determination, the first determination result of shifting to the third gaming state after the end of the special game and the third determination result after the end of the special game. Includes the second determination result that shifts to a gaming state other than the gaming state. Further, the second gaming state and the third gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination as compared with the first gaming state. Then, it has three game states of the first to third game states in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different, and the ball is entered into the first winning opening as an opportunity. On condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state is made after the end of the special game, and the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is an opportunity. On condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the third gaming state is performed after the end of the special game. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to the probabilistic machine including the so-called loop probabilistic machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to the appendix F10 and the appendix F11, the third gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, is gradually shifted to the third gaming state through the second gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the third gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, first shift to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. 2 It is necessary to obtain the first judgment result as the result of the special judgment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game-playing machine that gradually shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F12]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination. The gaming machine according to Appendix F9, characterized in that the transition to the first gaming state (mode A) is performed after the end of the special gaming.

Note: In the gaming machine according to F12, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the game shifts to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming, so that the second gaming state and the third gaming state are entered. The rate of stay in the state is low. On the other hand, in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second winning opening by the support by the movable accessory member, but also the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This mode has a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, by lowering the stay ratio of the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the gaming property is easy to fall into the first gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value obtained by the player. We can also provide a well-balanced gaming machine.

[Appendix F13]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination is made. A transition number setting means for setting the upper limit number of transitions to the special gaming state based on the first transition to the special gaming state, and
The gaming state transition means (41) is characterized in that it shifts to the first gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special gaming state of the maximum number of transitions set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine described in Appendix F9.

Note: The gaming machine related to F13 has three gaming states, the first to third gaming states, in which the expected value of the winning ratio between the first winning opening and the second winning opening is different, and up to the maximum number of transitions, the first hit. The transition to the special gaming state from is continued. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the second gaming state after the special game is completed. , On condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening is to shift to the special gaming state, the game is shifted to the third gaming state after the special game is completed. .. That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball is triggered by entering the first winning opening or the second winning opening. Therefore, in the transition opportunity to the remaining special gaming states after the first hit, the playability of how to shift to the third gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player, while leaving many transition opportunities to the special gaming states. It is possible to provide a gaming machine to have.

[Appendix F14]
In the gaming state transition means (41), the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the second gaming state (mode C') or the third gaming state (mode E') is the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to Appendix F9, characterized in that the player shifts to the first gaming state (mode A) when the above is reached.

[Appendix F15]
Further provided with a special variable ball entry device (82) having a special ball entry portion (824) opened in the special game.
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special in the special gaming in the special gaming state. On condition that the game ball enters the ball entry portion, the state is shifted to the second game state (mode C') after the end of the special game.
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the second gaming state (mode C') is to shift to the special gaming state, the special gaming in the special gaming state is described. The gaming machine according to Appendix F14, characterized in that the gaming machine shifts to the third gaming state (mode E') after the completion of the special gaming, provided that the gaming ball enters the special entry portion (824). ..

In the gaming machines according to the appendix F14 and the appendix F15, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the second gaming state or the third gaming state, the game is shifted to the first gaming state. To. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to the ST machine including the so-called V-ST machine. Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix F14 and the appendix F15, it is necessary to go through the second gaming state in order to shift to the third gaming state which is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the third gaming state, first shift to the second gaming state, and then in the second special symbol game until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. It is necessary that the result of the special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, how quickly the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state in the second special symbol game is obtained, and the transition to the third gaming state which is most advantageous to the player is obtained. It has a game property of whether to make it, and after shifting to the third game state, how many special game states are to be shifted to before the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game-like property of obtaining a result.

[Appendix F16]
The first special symbol display for executing the first special symbol game, in which the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L, 314R) is displayed by the first special symbol. Part (371) and
A second special symbol display unit (2) that executes a second special symbol game that displays the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) by the second special symbol. 372) and
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special gaming state. It is possible to enter the game ball by being activated, and the right to shift to the special game state (type 2 jackpot) by the game state transition means (41) is granted by the entry of the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833) and
Further prepare
The game state transition means (41) is
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the one that shifts to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), the transition to the special gaming state is performed.
The second gaming state (mode C) after the end of the special gaming in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state. To
After the operation of the feather accessory device (83) is completed, based on the right to shift to the special gaming state (type 2 jackpot) given by the game ball entering the special ball entry unit (833). Move to the special game state and
It is characterized in that it shifts to the third gaming state (mode E) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the gaming ball enters the special ball entering portion (833). The gaming machine described in Appendix F8.

[Appendix F17]
The gaming state transition means (41) is described when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the second gaming state or the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to Appendix F16, which is characterized by shifting to the first gaming state.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix F16 and the appendix F17, the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state (type 1 jackpot), or the gaming ball enters the special entry portion. By doing so, the right to shift to the special gaming state is granted (2 types of big hits), and the game shifts to the special gaming state. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can also be applied to the so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix F18]
The first detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the second detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. A normal determination means for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) triggered by the detection. Further equipped with (41)
The second gaming state (mode C, mode C') and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E') are based on the normal determination means (41) as compared with the first gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F3 to F17, characterized in that the probability that the movable accessory member (36) is determined to be activated in the normal determination is high.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F18, the probability of determining that the movable accessory member is activated in the ordinary determination by the ordinary determination means differs between the second gaming state, the third gaming state, and the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the first to third gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix F19]
In the second gaming state (mode C, mode C'), the gaming ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the first detecting means (318) as compared with the first gaming state (mode A). The gaming machine according to the appendix F1 to F18, wherein the time from the detection of the fact to the start of the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is short.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F19, in the second gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is performed after the game ball has been detected by the first detecting means as compared with the first gaming state. The time to start is short. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the first to third gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix F20]
The third gaming state (mode E, mode E') is the movable accessory member (36) as compared with the first gaming state (mode A) and the second gaming state (mode C, mode C'). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1 to F19, which is characterized by a long operating time.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F20, in the third gaming state, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer than in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to realize three gaming states of the first to third gaming states in which the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different by a simple method.

[Appendix G1]
Multiple winning openings that allow you to enter game balls,
A first position in which the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening (315) among a plurality of winning openings is restricted, and a first position in which the entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening (315) is permitted. Movable accessory member (36) that can operate between two positions,
An evacuation guidance unit (393,394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the specific winning opening (315).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Note: In the gaming machine according to G1, a retracting guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix G1, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the gaming machine is encouraged to be launched into the left region of the gaming board, a specific winning opening in the movable accessory member. Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time for the game ball to reach a specific winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching a specific winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix G2]
The evacuation guidance unit (393,394) includes the plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that the nails on the side far from the specific winning opening (315) are arranged in an inclined shape located lower than the nails on the side closer to the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in Appendix G1.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix G2, the gaming ball can be guided to the upstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Further, in a gaming machine, since a large number of nails are generally driven on a gaming board, it is possible to provide an evacuation guidance unit when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion, and to make it difficult to receive the support by the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member operates for a short time.

[Appendix G3]
The plurality of winning openings further include a predetermined winning opening (314R) having a function different from that of the specific winning opening (315).
The movable accessory member (36) is the first that allows the ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) and restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined winning opening (314R). A second position (operation) that limits the position (standby position) and the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening (315) and allows the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening (314R). The gaming machine according to the appendix G1 or the appendix G2, which is capable of operating with and from the position).

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G3, the entry of the gaming ball into a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated. Specifically, when the movable accessory member is in the first position where it is not operating, the game ball is allowed to enter the specific winning opening, while the game ball is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening. It is restricted, and when the movable accessory member is in the operating second position, the entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening is restricted, while the entry of the game ball into a predetermined winning opening is permitted. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix G3, the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into a specific winning opening, but also allows the gaming ball to enter a predetermined winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G4]
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314) is opened and the game ball is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314).
By covering the predetermined winning opening (314R) at the second position (operating position), the predetermined winning opening (314R) is closed and the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening (314R) is restricted. The gaming machine according to the appendix G3, which is characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix G4, the movable accessory member is allowed to enter a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member due to the simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed. Alternatively, it is possible to allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening as well as the limitation.

[Appendix G5]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The predetermined winning openings (314R, 314) are provided at positions where game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) can enter.
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while the specific winning opening (315) is allowed to enter. Restrict the entry of the ball,
While restricting the entry of the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314) at the second position (operating position), the entry to the specific winning opening (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to the appendix G4, which is characterized by allowing the entry of a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G5, when the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device and the game ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of operation, the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are specified while the game balls are allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating. The entry of the game ball to the winning opening is restricted, and when the movable accessory member is in the second position where the movable accessory member operates, the entry of the game ball to the predetermined winning opening is restricted, while the entry of the game ball to a specific winning opening is restricted. The entry of the game ball is allowed. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix G5, the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into a specific winning opening, but also allows the gaming ball to be distributed to the second passage. Allow or limit the entry of game balls into the winning opening at the same time. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix G5, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the winning ratio between a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G6]
The movable accessory member (36) is the predetermined winning opening (314R) of the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) between the second passage (352) and the predetermined winning opening (314R). ), The predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened in the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened in the second position (operating position). 314R) The gaming machine according to Appendix G5, which has an opening / closing portion (362) for closing the closed state.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix G6, a part of the movable accessory member is used as an opening / closing part to move the gaming ball through the second passage between the second passage and the predetermined winning opening toward the predetermined winning opening. In the middle of the path, for example, a movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed, so that the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening. , Allow or limit the entry of game balls into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix G7]
The movable accessory member (36) is continuous with the opening / closing portion (362), and the guide portion (363) for moving the game ball launched into the right side region of the gaming board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362). The gaming machine according to the appendix G6, which further comprises).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix G7, a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide portion continuous with the opening / closing portion, and the gaming ball launched in the right side region is provided at a position to move toward the opening / closing portion. , The movable accessory member can not only allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening, but also allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix G8]
The movable accessory member (36R) has a first portion (361R) for inserting a gaming ball into the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315), and the second winning opening. The gaming machine according to Appendix G3, which comprises a second portion (362R) for allowing a gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G8, the movable accessory member inserts the game ball into the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening and the game ball from the right side of the second winning opening. 2 It has a second part for entering a ball into the winning opening. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided in the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or limits the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening, and the second winning opening. Allowing or limiting the entry of game balls into the game can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix G9]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first starting port (314).
At the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (352), and the second The gaming machine according to Appendix G8, wherein the portion (362R) allows the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (352).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G9, the first portion of the movable accessory member enables the gaming ball in the second passage of the sorting device to enter the second winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which a first portion and a second portion are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix G10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). Further having a penetration (363R)
The game according to Appendix G8 or Appendix G9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetration portion (363R). Machine.

Note: In the gaming machine according to G10, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning opening.

[Appendix G11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
In the first portion (361R), the entry of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) into the specific winning opening (351) is restricted at the first position (operating position), and the above-mentioned Allowed in the second position (operating position),
In the second portion (362R), the entry of the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) into the specific winning opening (351) is restricted at the first position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G8 to G10, characterized in that it is allowed in the second position (operating position).

Note: In the gaming machine according to G11, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning opening.

[Appendix G12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S).
The tips of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other in the first position (standby position), and they are close to each other in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix G3, wherein the tip portions of the machines are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible not only to allow or limit the entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member, but also to allow or limit the entry of the game ball into a predetermined winning opening.

[Appendix G13]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is said to be in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the predetermined winning opening (314), and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) at the operating position The gaming machine according to Appendix G12, characterized in that the gaming ball is moved toward the specific winning opening (315) by interfering with the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G13, when the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device and the game ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, it is used as a movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are operated, the entry of the game ball into a predetermined winning opening and a specific winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game ball distributed to the second passage is a game ball to a predetermined winning opening when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member as the movable accessory member are in the standby position. While the entry of the ball is permitted, the entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening is restricted, and when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are in the operating position, the predetermined winning opening is entered. While the entry of the game ball is restricted, the entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening is allowed. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix G13, not only the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member allow or limit the entry of the game ball into a specific winning opening, but also the second passage. At the same time, the allowance or restriction of the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening of the game ball distributed to the above is performed. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix G13, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the winning ratio between a predetermined winning opening and a specific winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G14]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
A gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the game ball and the specific winning opening (315), and the game ball launched in the right area of the game board (31) is directed toward the specific winning opening (315). Induction part (31M') to move and
Further prepare
The movable accessory member (36S to 36X) is
In the first position (standby position), the specific winning opening (315) is closed, and the ball is launched into the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the right region of the game board (31). Restricting the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening (315),
In the second position (operating position), the specific winning opening (315) is opened, and a passage for a gaming ball is formed between the guiding portion (31M') and the specific winning opening (315). The appendix G1 or the appendix is characterized in that the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the gaming ball launched into the right side region are allowed to enter the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine described in G2.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G14, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the passage of the gaming ball is formed between the guide portion and the specific winning opening, so that the second passage of the sorting device is formed. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball launched in the right area of the game board can be entered into a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, one movable accessory member makes it possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix G15]
The movable accessory member (36T) can be slidably moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position).
The first position (standby position) is a position where the specific winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened.
The gaming machine according to Appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the specific winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

Note: The gaming machine according to G15 has a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is slid between the first position for closing the specific winning opening and the second position for closing the gap between the guide portion and the specific winning opening. One movable accessory member makes it possible to insert a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths.

[Appendix G16]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36W) can operate between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation.
The first position (standby position) is a position where the specific winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened.
The gaming machine according to Appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the specific winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix G17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along a gaming board (31).

[Appendix G18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G16 to G18, the movable accessory member is rotated horizontally at the first position where the specific winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guide portion and the specific winning opening is closed. With a simple configuration of allowing a game ball to enter a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix G19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G18, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second starting port (315) and the third position (standby position) for opening the gap.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G19, the gaming ball in the right region of the sorting device is movable in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short time without providing the evacuation guidance unit. It is possible to prevent the accessory member from being guided to the second starting port.

[Appendix G20]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable and opens the second starting port (315) and the closing portion (364W) capable of closing the gap, and the second starting port (315) and the gap. It has a possible penetration (363W) and
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed by the closed portion (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W).
The second position (operating position) is characterized in that the second winning opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing portion (364W). The gaming machine described in Appendix G14.

In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G20, a movable accessory member having a closed portion and a penetrating portion is rotated, so that the game ball is entered into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Will be possible.

[Appendix G21]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. It is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A game is performed by penetrating along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis and penetrating in a direction intersecting a first penetrating portion (361X) through which a game ball can pass and the first penetrating portion (361X) in the direction of the rotation axis. It has a second penetration (362X) through which the ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetrating portion (362X).
The gaming machine according to Appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetrating portion (361X) communicates with the specific winning opening (315).

Note: In the gaming machine according to G21, a gaming ball is inserted into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member due to a simple configuration in which a rotating body is rotated between a specific winning opening and a guiding portion. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix G22]
A gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the specific winning opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G14 to G21, further comprising a guard portion (31B) for preventing the machine from exceeding the specific winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G22, by providing a guard portion, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward a specific winning opening is surely specified as a winning prize. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix G23]
A detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the movable accessory member (36) is placed in the first position (standby position) and the first position. A normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not to operate between two positions (operating positions), and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note G5 to Supplementary note G7 to Supplementary note G11, and Supplementary note G13 to Supplementary note G22.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix G23, a gaming ball detecting means is provided in a second passage where the gaming ball can be entered into a specific winning opening by the operation of the movable accessory member, and the gaming ball is detected by this detecting means. With this as an opportunity, a normal determination as to whether or not to operate the movable accessory member is performed by the normal determination means. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the appendix G23, although the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage, whether or not the movable accessory member is operated, that is, the movable accessory member is used to reach a specific winning opening. Whether or not a game ball can be entered is usually determined according to the result of the determination. Therefore, whether or not the game ball in the second passage enters a specific winning opening depends on the result of the normal determination, so that the game is unlikely to be monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix G24]
The specific winning opening (315) is a special determination (big hit) as to whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G23, which provides an opportunity to perform a lottery).

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note G1 to Supplementary note G24, wherein the specific winning slot (313') is a general winning slot.

[Appendix H1]
Multiple winning openings (314, 315) that allow game balls to enter,
A game to a first position (standby position) in which entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening (315) among the plurality of winning openings (314, 315) is restricted and to the specific winning opening (315). A movable accessory member that can move to and from a second position (operating position) where the ball is allowed to enter, and moves the game ball toward the specific winning opening (315) at the second position. 36) and
Equipped with
The movable accessory member (36) is a gaming machine characterized by having a delay portion (364) that delays the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H1, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the gaming ball to a specific winning opening. Therefore, for example, even if the movable accessory member receives the game ball by the movable accessory member, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable accessory member is short and the player strikes right, the game ball is caused by the delay portion. Can secure a long time to reach a specific winning opening. This prevents the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching a specific winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the movable accessory member when the above is performed.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, wherein the delay portion (364,364A to 364C) moves the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36,36A to 36C) by a meandering path.

[Appendix H3]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) is one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (364D to 364G) extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H). 364H) The gaming machine according to Supplementary note H1 or Supplementary note H2.

[Appendix H4]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is either a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) from the appendix H1 to the appendix H3. The described gaming machine.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H4, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a grid pattern.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices H2 to H5, the movement of the gaming ball in the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay portion having a simple structure. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally built into the movable accessory member by resin molding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion.

[Appendix H6]
From Appendix H1, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine described in any of the appendices H5.

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the gaming ball.

[Appendix H8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6 or Appendix H7, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) exert a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force on the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices H6 to H8, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member is improved. Because it becomes easier to pay attention to, the fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix H9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and is launched into the left area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). A distribution device (35) that distributes the game ball to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the distribution unit (38).
The first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
A second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31), and
Further prepare
The movable accessory member (36) is
It is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (318) or the second detecting means (319). ,
When the player is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H8.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H9, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, one movable accessory member makes it possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix H10]
The appendix is characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as compared with the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in H9.

[Appendix H11]
The right side region so that the second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball by launching the game ball into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318). It is better to launch the game ball into the right side region so that the first game state, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the game ball, and the passage of the game ball are detected by the second detection means (319). 1 A game between a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means (318). Further equipped with a game state transition means (41) for transitioning states,
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix H10, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices H10 and H11, it is easy for the movable accessory member to enter the gaming ball into a specific winning opening depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter a specific winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to a specific winning opening. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix H12]
In the specific winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the second detecting means (319) to enter the specific winning opening (315) is the time required for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix H11, wherein the gaming ball detected by) is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the gaming ball to enter the specific winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H12, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning opening and the game ball detected by the second detecting means are the specific winning openings. The time required to enter the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter a specific winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right area makes it difficult to enter a specific winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix H13]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the first detecting means (318) is the specific winning opening. It is a time to allow the ball to be entered in (315) and to limit the entry of the gaming ball detected by the second detection means (319) into the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix H11 or the appendix H12 as a feature.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H13, it is possible to appropriately limit the entry of a gaming ball into a specific winning opening when a right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix H14]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the gaming ball detected by the second detecting means (319) is the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices H11 to H13, which is characterized in that it is a time allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H14, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into a specific winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix H15]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The predetermined winning openings (314R, 314) are provided at positions where game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) can enter.
The movable accessory member (36) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314), while the specific winning opening (315) is allowed to enter. Restrict the entry of the ball,
While restricting the entry of the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the predetermined winning opening (314R, 314) at the second position (operating position), the entry to the specific winning opening (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H14, characterized in that the ball is allowed to enter.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H15, when the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, the movable accessory member Depending on the presence or absence of operation, the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are specified while the game balls are allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operating. The entry of the game ball to the winning opening is restricted, and when the movable accessory member is in the second position where the movable accessory member operates, the entry of the game ball to the predetermined winning opening is restricted, while the entry of the game ball to a specific winning opening is restricted. The entry of the game ball is allowed. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix H15, the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into the specific winning opening, but also allows the gaming ball to be distributed to the second passage. Allow or limit the entry of game balls into the winning opening at the same time. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix H15, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other to change the winning ratio between a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H16]
The movable accessory member (36) is the predetermined winning opening (314R) of the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) between the second passage (352) and the predetermined winning opening (314R). ), The predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened in the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (314R) is opened in the second position (operating position). 314R) The gaming machine according to the appendix H15, which has an opening / closing portion (362) for closing the closed state.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H16, a part of the movable accessory member is used as an opening / closing part to move the game ball through the second passage between the second passage and the predetermined winning opening toward the predetermined winning opening. In the middle of the path, for example, a movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed, so that the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening. It is possible to allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix H17]
The movable accessory member (36) is continuous with the opening / closing portion (362), and the guide portion (363) for moving the game ball launched into the right side region of the gaming board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362). The gaming machine according to the appendix H16, which further comprises).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix H17, a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide portion continuous with the opening / closing portion, and the gaming ball launched in the right side region is provided at a position to move toward the opening / closing portion. , The movable accessory member can not only allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening, but also allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix H18]
The movable accessory member (36R) has a first portion (361R) for inserting a gaming ball into the specific winning opening (315) from the left side of the specific winning opening (315), and the specific winning opening. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices H1 to H17, comprising a second portion (362R) for allowing the gaming ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) from the right side of (315). ..

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H18, the movable accessory member identifies the first part in which the gaming ball is entered into the specific winning opening from the left side of the specific winning opening, and the gaming ball is specified from the right side of the specific winning opening. It has a second part, which allows the ball to enter the winning opening of the ball. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided in the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or limits the entry of the game ball into a predetermined winning opening, and a specific winning opening. Allowing or limiting the entry of game balls into the game can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix H19]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the other specific starting port (314).
At the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the specific winning opening (315), and the second The gaming machine according to Appendix H18, wherein the portion (362R) allows the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the specific winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H19, the first portion of the movable accessory member enables the gaming ball in the second passage of the sorting device to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which a first portion and a second portion are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter a predetermined winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix H20]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). Further having a penetration (363R)
The game according to Appendix H18 or Supplementary H19, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetration portion (363R). Machine.

Note: In the gaming machine according to H20, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning opening.

[Appendix H21]
The movable accessory member (36R) is
In the first portion (361R), the entry of the game ball passing through the second passage (352) into the specific winning opening (315) is restricted at the first position (operating position), and the above-mentioned Allowed in the second position (operating position),
In the second portion (362R), the entry of the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) into the specific winning opening (315) is restricted at the first position (operating position). The gaming machine according to the appendix H19 or the appendix H20, which is permissible at the second position (operating position).

Note: In the gaming machine according to H21, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning opening.

[Appendix H22]
The specific winning opening (315) is a special determination (big hit) as to whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H121, characterized in that it provides an opportunity to perform a lottery).

[Appendix H23]
The first special determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not the plurality of winning openings are transferred to a special gaming state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. ), And whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball and the first winning opening (314). Including the second winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to make the second special judgment (big hit lottery) of
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H22, wherein the specific winning slot (315) is the second winning slot.

[Appendix I1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is provided.
The distribution unit (38) is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is fixed at a position where it interferes.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the distribution unit of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can adjust the launch position of the game ball and perform trial and error to find the launch position of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. Enjoy searching for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to get the pleasure of searching for an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary note I1, wherein the distribution portion (38D, 38F) has a fixed portion (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I3, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I2 to I4, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices I3 to I5, at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed. It will be possible to return. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time.

[Appendix I6]
The distribution section (38F) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with one nail as the top and the vertical line passing through the one nail as the axis of symmetry in the front view. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the nail at the top.

[Appendix I7]
The distribution portion (38E) has a rotating body (382D) rotatably fixed by the fixing portion (381D).
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is played toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I2 to I5, characterized in that the ball can be rotated in a second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the gaming ball to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix I8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I7, wherein the rotating body (382D) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix I9]
The distribution unit (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix I8 and the appendix I9, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution part, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix J1]
The first winning opening (314, 314R, 313') where you can enter a game ball,
The second winning opening (315), which allows the entry of game balls and has a different function from the first winning opening (314, 314R, 313'),
The entry of the game ball into one of the first winning opening (314, 314R, 313') and the second winning opening (315) (314, 314R, 313') is restricted, and the above-mentioned A first position (standby position) that allows a game ball to enter the other winning opening (315), which is different from one winning opening (314, 314R), and the one winning opening (314, 314R, 313'). ), And a movable accessory member that can move between the second position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the other winning opening (315) and restricts the entry of the game ball into the other winning opening (315). 36, 36R, 36S) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated, the gaming ball is allowed to enter one of the first winning opening and the second winning opening. In the state where the entry of the game ball into the other winning opening is restricted, and the entry of the gaming ball into one winning opening is restricted, while the entry of the gaming ball into the other winning opening is restricted. One of the acceptable conditions is achieved. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the appendix J1, the movable accessory member not only allows or limits the entry of the game ball into one winning opening, but also allows the gaming ball to enter the other winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J2]
The movable accessory member (36) is
The first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the open state at the first position (standby position), and the first winning opening (314R, 313') is closed at the second position (operating position). The opening and closing part (362)
Continuing from the opening / closing portion (362), the movement of the game ball to the right of the first winning opening at the first position (standby position) is restricted toward the opening / closing portion (362), and the second position (standby position) is restricted. A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the operating position).
The gaming machine according to the appendix J1, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing portion that can open and close the first winning opening and a guide portion that moves the game ball to the right of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion is provided. With a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening and the permission or restriction of the entry of a game ball into the second winning opening.

[Appendix J3]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The opening / closing portion (362) is
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the first winning opening (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning is allowed. Restrict entry into the mouth (315),
In the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the second winning opening (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning is restricted. Allows the ball to enter the mouth (315),
The guide portion is
At the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right side region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362) is restricted, and at the second position (operating position), the game board is used. The gaming machine according to Appendix J2, wherein the gaming ball launched in the right side region of (31) is allowed to move toward the opening / closing portion (362).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J3, the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, and the game ball operates the movable accessory member. Depending on the presence or absence of, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix J3, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J4]
The movable accessory member (36R) has a first portion (361R) for allowing a gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315), and the second winning opening. The gaming machine according to the appendix J1, wherein the gaming machine has a second portion (362R) for allowing the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J4, the movable accessory member inserts the game ball into the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening and the game ball from the right side of the second winning opening. 2 It has a second part for entering a ball into the winning opening. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided in the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or limits the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening, and the second winning opening. Allowing or limiting the entry of game balls into the game can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix J5]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first starting port (314).
At the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (352), and the second The gaming machine according to Appendix J4, wherein the portion (362R) allows the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (352).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J5, the first portion of the movable accessory member enables the gaming ball in the second passage of the sorting device to enter the second winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which a first portion and a second portion are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix J6]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). Further having a penetration (363R)
The game according to Appendix J4 or Appendix J5, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetration portion (363R). Machine.

Note: In the gaming machine according to F6, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetration part and entered into a specific winning opening.

[Appendix J7]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S).
The tips of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other in the first position (standby position), and they are close to each other in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that the tips thereof are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J7, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the permission or restriction of the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening.

[Appendix J8]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is said to be in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved to the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix J7, characterized in that the passing gaming balls interfere with each other to move the gaming balls toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J8, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the gaming ball is the first movable accessory member as a movable accessory member in the second passage by the sorting device. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix J8, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J9]
Further provided with a first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first specific area (352) through which the game ball launched into the left side area of the game board can pass.
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to I8, which is characterized in that it is operated.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J9, when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first detecting means, the movable accessory member allows the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening. As a result, the movable accessory member can make the game ball launched in the left area of the game board win a prize in the second winning opening.

[Appendix J10]
Further provided with a second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a second specific area through which the game ball launched into the right side area of the game board can pass.
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detecting means (319). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to I9, which is characterized in that it is operated.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix J10, when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the second detecting means, the movable accessory member allows the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening. As a result, the movable accessory member can make the game ball launched in the right area of the game board win a prize in the second winning opening.

[Appendix J11]
The first winning opening (314R, 314) is the first of whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. It gives an opportunity to make a special judgment (big hit lottery).
The second winning opening (315) is a second special determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering the game ball. It gives an opportunity to perform (big hit lottery) and
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J10, wherein the second special determination has a higher degree of expectation that a determination result for shifting to the second special game can be obtained as compared with the first special determination. ..

[Appendix J12]
The first winning opening (313') is a general winning opening, and the second winning opening (315) is a special gaming state in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. It provides an opportunity to make a special judgment (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to (big hit game state).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J10.

[Appendix K1]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) according to the method.
The first winning opening where you can enter a game ball,
A first winning opening (314) capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the first passage (351) or the second passage (352).
A second winning opening that can enter a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and has a different function from the first winning opening.
The first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) and the second position (operation) that allows the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315). Movable accessory members (36S to 36X) that can move between (position) and
A gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the second winning opening (315) and the game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) toward the second winning opening (315). Induction part (31M') to move and
Equipped with
The movable accessory member (36S to 36X) is
In the first position (standby position), the second winning opening (315) was closed and launched into the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the right region of the game board (31). Restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening (315),
At the second position (operating position), the second winning opening (315) is opened, and a passage for a gaming ball is formed between the guiding portion (31M') and the second winning opening (315). A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball launched into the right side region is allowed to enter the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K1, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the passage of the gaming ball is formed between the guide portion and the second winning opening, so that the second passage of the distribution device is formed. Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball launched in the right area of the game board can be entered into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix K2]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S).
The tips of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other in the first position (standby position), and they are close to each other in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that the tips thereof are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K2, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the permission or restriction of the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening.

[Appendix K3]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is said to be in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved to the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix K2, characterized in that the passing gaming balls interfere with each other to move the gaming balls toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K3, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the gaming ball is the first movable accessory member as a movable accessory member in the second passage by the sorting device. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix K3, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K4]
The movable accessory member (36T) can be slidably moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position).
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

Note: In the gaming machine related to K4, the movable accessory member is slid at the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guide portion and the second winning opening is closed. One movable accessory member makes it possible to insert a game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths.

[Appendix K5]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36V) can operate between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation.
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed and the gap is opened.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix K6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the gaming board (31).

[Appendix K7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices K5 to K7, the movable accessory member is horizontally oriented at the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guide portion and the second winning opening is closed. With a simple configuration of rotating the ball to the second winning opening, it is possible to insert the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K7, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second starting port (315) and the third position (standby position) for opening the gap.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K8, the gaming ball in the right region of the sorting device is movable in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short time without providing the evacuation guidance unit. It is possible to prevent the accessory member from being guided to the second starting port.

[Appendix K9]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable and opens the second starting port (315) and the closing portion (364W) capable of closing the gap, and the second starting port (315) and the gap. It has a possible penetration (363W) and
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed by the closed portion (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W).
The second position (operating position) is characterized in that the second winning opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing portion (364W). The gaming machine described in Appendix K1.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K9, the game ball is entered into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member having the closed portion and the penetrating portion is rotated. Will be possible.

[Appendix K10]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. It is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X) is
A game is performed by penetrating along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis and penetrating in a direction intersecting a first penetrating portion (361X) through which a game ball can pass and the first penetrating portion (361X) in the direction of the rotation axis. It has a second penetration (362X) through which the ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetrating portion (362X).
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetrating portion (361X) communicates with the second starting port (315).

Note: In the gaming machine according to K10, a gaming ball is inserted into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member due to a simple configuration in which a rotating body is rotated between the second winning opening and the guiding portion. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix K11]
A gaming ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the second winning opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K4 to K10, further comprising a guard portion (31B) for preventing the machine from exceeding the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix K11, by providing a guard portion, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward the second starting port is surely second prized. You can put the ball in your mouth.

[Appendix L1]
Multiple winning openings (314, 315) that allow game balls to enter,
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38), and is launched into the left area of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). A distribution device (35) that distributes the game ball to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the distribution unit (38).
The first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) and the second position (operation) that allows the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (314R). Movable accessory member (36) that can move between (position) and
The first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), and
A second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board (31), and
Further prepare
The movable accessory member (36) is
It is operated from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (318) or the second detecting means (319). ,
When the player is in the second position, any of the game balls passing through the second passage (352) and the game balls passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the specific winning opening (315). A gaming machine characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix L1, not only the gaming ball passing through the second passage of the sorting device but also the gaming ball launched in the right area of the gaming board enters a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made to. Therefore, one movable accessory member makes it possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths. This makes it possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix L2]
The appendix is characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a longer operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as compared with the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in L1.

[Appendix L3]
The right side region so that the second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball by launching the game ball into the left side region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318). It is better to launch the game ball into the right side region so that the first game state, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of launching the game ball, and the passage of the game ball are detected by the second detection means (319). 1 A game between a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the gaming ball is launched into the left side region so that the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the detection means (318). Further equipped with a game state transition means (41) for transitioning states,
The first condition is that it is in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C).
The gaming machine according to Appendix L2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices L2 and L3, it is easy for the movable accessory member to enter the gaming ball into a specific winning opening depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. Is different. For example, the operating time of the movable accessory member is different depending on the gaming state (advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the movable accessory member is operated, and it is difficult for the game ball launched in the right side region to enter a specific winning opening, depending on the movement path of the game ball. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to a specific winning opening. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix L4]
In the specific winning opening (315), the time required for the gaming ball detected by the second detecting means (319) to enter the specific winning opening (315) is the time required for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix L3, wherein the gaming ball detected by) is arranged at a position longer than the time required for the gaming ball to enter the specific winning opening (315).

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix L4, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning opening and the game ball detected by the second detecting means are the specific winning openings. The time required to enter the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter a specific winning opening, while a game ball launched in the right area makes it difficult to enter a specific winning opening. Will be possible. As a result, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It will be possible to do.

[Appendix L5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is such that the gaming ball detected by the first detecting means (318) is the specific winning opening. It is a time to allow the ball to be entered in (315) and to limit the entry of the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) into the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to the appendix L3 or the appendix L4 as a feature.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix L5, it is possible to appropriately limit the entry of a gaming ball into a specific winning opening when a right-handed hit is made in the first gaming state in which left-handed hitting is encouraged. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is made in a situation where left-handed strikes are encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Will be possible.

[Appendix L6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is such that the gaming ball detected by the second detecting means (319) is the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L3 to L5, which is characterized in that it is a time allowed to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix L6, it is possible to insert a gaming ball into a specific winning opening by hitting right in the second gaming state. Therefore, by hitting right in the second game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game in a state where there is almost no increase or decrease in the game ball.

[Appendix L7]
The movable accessory member (36) is
The first winning opening (314R, 313') is in the open state at the first position (standby position), and the first winning opening (314R, 313') is closed at the second position (operating position). The opening and closing part (362)
Continuing from the opening / closing portion (362), the movement of the game ball to the right of the first winning opening at the first position (standby position) is restricted toward the opening / closing portion (362), and the second position (standby position) is restricted. A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball to the right of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the operating position).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions L1 to L6.

According to the gaming machine according to the appendix L7, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing portion that can open and close the first winning opening and a guide portion that moves the game ball to the right of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion is provided. With a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening and the permission or restriction of the entry of a game ball into the second winning opening.

[Appendix L8]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The opening / closing portion (362) is
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the first winning opening (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning is allowed. Restrict entry into the mouth (315),
In the second position (operating position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the second winning opening (314R, 313'), whereas the second winning is restricted. Allows the ball to enter the mouth (315),
The guide portion is
At the first position (standby position), the movement of the gaming ball launched into the right side region of the gaming board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362) is restricted, and at the second position (operating position), the gaming board is used. The gaming machine according to Appendix L7, characterized in that the gaming ball launched into the right side region of (31) is allowed to move toward the opening / closing portion (362).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L8, the game ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game ball is distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, and the game ball operates the movable accessory member. Depending on the presence or absence of, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix L8, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L9]
The movable accessory member (36R) has a first portion (361R) for allowing a gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the left side of the second winning opening (315), and the second winning opening. The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L6, which comprises a second portion (362R) for allowing the gaming ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315). ..

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L9, the movable accessory member inserts the game ball into the second winning opening from the left side of the second winning opening and the game ball from the right side of the second winning opening. 2 It has a second part for entering a ball into the winning opening. As a result, with a simple configuration in which the first part and the second part are provided in the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or limits the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening, and the second winning opening. Allowing or limiting the entry of game balls into the game can be performed at the same time.

[Appendix L10]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
The movable accessory member (36R) is
At the first position (standby position), the game ball passing through the second passage is allowed to enter the first starting port (314).
At the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (352), and the second The gaming machine according to Appendix L9, wherein the portion (362R) allows the gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (352).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L10, the first portion of the movable accessory member enables the gaming ball in the second passage of the sorting device to enter the second winning opening. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, the movable accessory member has a simple configuration in which a first portion and a second portion are provided, and the movable accessory member allows the game ball to enter the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix L11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). Further having a penetration (363R)
The game according to Appendix L9 or Appendix L10, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetration portion (363R). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L11, both the gaming ball in the second passage and the gaming ball in the right region have a simple configuration in which a penetrating portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclined states. It can be moved to the penetrating part and entered into a specific winning opening.

[Appendix L12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S).
The tips of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other in the first position (standby position), and they are close to each other in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L6, wherein the tip portions of the slingshot machines are separated from each other.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can simultaneously allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the permission or restriction of the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening.

[Appendix L13]
The game ball having an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution section (38) and introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution section (38). Further, a distribution device (35) for distributing to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) is further provided.
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is said to be in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved to the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to Appendix L12, characterized in that the passing gaming balls interfere with each other to move the gaming balls toward the second winning opening (315).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix L13, the gaming ball is distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the gaming ball is the first movable accessory member as a movable accessory member in the second passage by the distribution device. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to the appendix L13, the distribution device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming ball distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member is sent to the first winning opening. Allow or limit the entry of the ball and allow or limit the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening at the same time. As a result, in a gaming machine that employs a distribution device, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that has new playability according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 31B: Guard nail 314: First starting port 314L: Left first starting port 314R: Right first starting port 315: Second starting port 316: Variable winning device 316b: Variable winning opening 318: First through gate 319: Second through gate 35, 35A, 35B, 35C, 35D, 35E, 35F: Distribution device 351: First passage 352: Second passage 36, 36A to 36R, 36T to 36X: Electric support member 36S: Electric tulip accessory device 3681S: Left wing member 3682S: Right wing member 361X: First penetration portion 362X: Second penetration portion 361X', 362X': Through hole 362: Opening / closing portion 363; Guide portion 363W: Through hole 363W ': Penetration portion 364W: Closed portion 364, 364A, 364B: Delay guide 364C: Serpentine groove 364D to 364G: Linear convex portion 364H: Linear concave portion 364OI to 364N: Convex portion 364O, 364P: Concave 364Q: Roller 371: First 1 Special symbol display 372: 2nd special symbol display 373: Normal symbol display 374: Hold number display 38, 38A, 38B: Distribution member 38C: Roller 38D: Windmill 381D: Nail 382D: Rotating body 38E: Mountain Shape fixing part 38F: Triangular nail 389F: Apical nail 393,394: Evacuation guide nail 41: MPU
82: Special variable winning device 824: V winning opening 824
83: Feather accessory device 833: V winning opening 99: Game ball

Claims (1)

The game board has an introduction port, a first flow path, a second flow path, and a distribution unit, and the game ball introduced from the introduction port from a predetermined area on the left side of the game board is subjected to the distribution unit. A gaming machine provided with a ball flow path forming means for distributing and flowing down to either one flow path or the second flow path.
A plurality of winning means including a first winning means and a second winning means having a function different from that of the first winning means.
Discharging means for discharging game balls that did not enter the plurality of winning means, and
A first detection means for detecting a game ball when the game ball flows down the second flow path, and
When the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the game ball enters the second prize-winning means from the first position where the entry of the game ball into the second prize-winning means is restricted. A movable means that can move to the second position where the ball is allowed,
Equipped with
The game balls distributed to the first flow path can enter the first winning means.
When the movable means is in the first position, the game ball distributed to the second flow path and reaching the movable means is restricted from entering the second winning means, and then discharged from the discharging means. Can be
When the movable means is in the second position, the game ball that has been distributed to the second flow path and reached the movable means can be allowed to enter the second winning means.
The gaming machine is
A second detection means for detecting that the game ball has flowed down in a specific area provided in the right side area of the game board, and
It is advantageous for the player to detect the flow of the game ball by the first detection means, and it is advantageous for the player to detect the flow of the game ball by the second detection means. A game state transition means for shifting a game state between a game state and a plurality of game states including
Equipped with
The operating time of the movable means in the first gaming state is such that the gaming ball detected by the first detecting means can enter the second winning means and is detected by the second detecting means. A gaming machine characterized in that the played gaming ball is configured so as not to be subsequently entered into the second winning means.

Images